JP2019201694A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a fair game machine including a determination probability setting function and clarifying changes in determination probability setting.SOLUTION: A game machine includes setting notification confirmation means for executing a setting notification indicating that a predetermined determination probability has been set and determining whether or not the setting notification is executed for a predetermined time, when the predetermined determination probability is set by determination probability setting means. First movable control means executes the initial operation of a first movable unit after determining that the setting notification confirmation means has executed a setting notification for a predetermined time, after power supply means starts supplying power.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 47

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and is particularly applicable to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

  In some conventional gaming machines, a hit determination is performed with a predetermined jackpot probability based on a ball entering the start opening, and when the result of the determination is a big hit, a big hit game that opens the big winning opening is executed. Some game shop staffs have a probability setting function for changing the jackpot probability by performing a predetermined operation on the gaming machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-10-57583

  On the other hand, there is a case where the setting of the gaming machine is confirmed when the profit amount attached to the player is far from the assumption. In addition, when the cause is that the setting of the gaming machine is not intended, the probability setting person on the amusement store side has set it erroneously (with a probability different from the schedule), or It is necessary to confirm whether the fraudster has set the probability illegally. However, since it is not known when the big hit probability setting has been changed, it takes a lot of labor to check the security camera or the like. In addition, when such an illegal act is performed, there is a risk that both the game store and the player are disadvantaged, the number of players decreases, and the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases.

  Also, some of them have a movable object that operates to show the feasibility of a big hit game or that operates in accordance with the display of variation in symbols, and the movable object is surely positioned at a specific position of the gaming machine. For this reason, there is one that causes an initial operation when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and in a gaming machine equipped with a determination probability setting function, the determination probability setting change is clarified and a fair gaming machine is provided.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information;
When the determination result by the determination means is a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, and a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
A first movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
First movable control means for controlling the operation of the first movable part,
The first movable control unit is configured to initially operate the first movable unit as the power supply unit starts power supply.
When a predetermined determination probability is set by the determination probability setting means, setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability is set is executed,
A setting notification confirmation unit for determining whether or not the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time;
The first movable control unit performs an initial operation of the first movable unit after it is determined that the setting notification checking unit has performed setting notification for a predetermined time after the power supply unit starts supplying power. It is characterized by.

  According to such a gaming machine, a determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability of the determination unit, and a determination probability selection unit that can select a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation And a determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. A first moving part that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode with the start of power supply is provided, and when a predetermined determination probability is set, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability is set is executed Shall. In addition, a setting notification confirmation unit for confirming that the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined time is provided, and after the start of power supply, after determining that the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined time, the initial operation of the first movable unit is executed.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part executed in accordance with the start of power supply in the order of the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part. In addition, it is possible to execute the initial operation of the first movable part after securing the set notification time of the predetermined time. Also, this prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that there has been a setting change from being hindered by the initial operation of the first movable part, and ensures the visibility of the setting notification for a predetermined period of time, It is possible to reliably notify that the setting has been changed.

The gaming machine of the second invention is the gaming machine of the first invention,
Along with the variation display of the identification information, an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect,
The setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit and executed.
The initial operation of the first movable unit is an operation mode of passing through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect is provided, the setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit, and the initial operation of the first movable unit has a position overlapping the front of the effect display unit. It is set as the operation | movement aspect to pass. This prevents the setting notification displayed on the effect display unit from being obstructed by the initial operation of the first movable unit, ensures the visibility of the setting notification, and reliably notifies that there has been a setting change. It becomes possible. The “initial operation of the first movable part” means that the first movable part has no operational defect (the movable part has no failure) or the first movable part is positioned at the initial position (origin position). This is an operation for moving to the initial position when it is in a place other than the initial position, and is an operation process executed when the power is turned on. This is also referred to as home return operation.

The gaming machine of the third invention is the gaming machine of the second invention,
A second movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
Second movable control means for controlling the operation of the second movable part,
The second movable control means is for initial operation of the second movable part as the power supply means starts power supply,
The initial operation of the second movable unit is an operation mode that does not pass the position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit,
After the power supply means starts supplying power, an initial operation of the second movable part is executed, and thereafter an initial operation of the first movable part is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the first movable part, the second movable part that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode with the start of power supply is provided, and the initial operation of the second movable part is the first Unlike 1 movable part, it is set as the operation | movement aspect which does not pass the position which overlaps with the front surface of an effect display part. Then, after the start of power supply, the initial operation of the second movable part is executed, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed. Thereby, the initial operation of the second movable unit that does not hinder the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification is preceded by the initial operation of the first movable unit that can impair the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification. It is possible to execute. This also makes it possible to quickly advance the initial operation of the movable part and quickly bring the gaming machine into a game-ready state.

The gaming machine of the fourth invention is the gaming machine of the third invention,
The setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part are executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part can be executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed. Thereby, the initial operation of the second movable part that does not hinder the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification is executed in parallel with the setting notification, and the setting notification is displayed after performing the setting notification for a predetermined period. It is possible to execute the initial operation of the first movable part that can hinder the visibility of the effect display part. As a result, the initial operation of the first movable part and the second movable part can be quickly terminated without impeding the visibility of the setting notification, and the gaming machine after power-on can be quickly brought into a game-ready state. Become.

  The setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part are started in parallel, and the initial operation of the second movable part is completed even after the setting notification for a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of the setting change). If not, the initial operation of the first movable part may be executed in parallel with the initial operation of the second movable part that is continued, or after the initial operation of the second movable part is completed. May be. In addition, when the setting notification is continued even after the elapse of a predetermined period (a period sufficient for the notification of the setting change), the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part are executed in parallel after the elapse of the predetermined period. May be. In other words, the period during which the initial operation of the first movable part is not performed may be set as a predetermined period (a period sufficient for reporting the setting change) as the setting notification execution period.

Further, the gaming machine of the fifth invention is the gaming machine of the third invention or the fourth invention,
Comprising an initial operation confirmation means for determining whether or not the initial operation of the second movable part is completed;
The first movable control unit is configured to determine that the setting notification confirmation unit has executed the setting notification for a predetermined time, and after determining that the initial operation confirmation unit has finished the initial operation, the first movable unit The initial operation is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the initial operation confirmation means for determining whether or not the initial operation of the second movable part has been completed is provided. Then, after the setting notification is executed for a predetermined time and after the initial operation is completed, the initial operation of the first movable unit is executed. Thereby, it is possible to execute the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part, which are performed with the start of power supply, before the initial operation of the first movable part. In addition, since the setting notification time for a predetermined time is ensured and the initial operation of the first movable part is started after the operation of the second movable part is completed, the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed is provided. It is possible to prevent the first moving part from being obstructed by the initial operation and reliably notify that the setting has been changed.

The gaming machine of the sixth invention is the gaming machine of the first invention to the fifth invention,
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; With
The determination probability setting means includes:
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability of the determination unit can be changed,
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means is made unchangeable.

  According to such a gaming machine, the memory holding means capable of storing and holding gaming state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) even after the power supply is stopped. It is supposed to be prepared. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased and selected by the determination probability selection unit on the condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It was possible to change to the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, it is impossible to change the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection unit.

  Accordingly, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the determination probability setting is changed It becomes possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it becomes possible to clarify the setting change of the determination probability and to provide a fair gaming machine.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display device shown in FIG. 3, and is a view showing display devices provided in the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a block diagram, such as a power supply board. It is a table | surface which shows a response | compatibility etc. with the classification of winning and the opening pattern of a big prize opening. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to special symbols acquired by the game control microcomputer, (B) is a table showing random numbers related to normal symbols acquired by the game control microcomputer, and (C) is a reach determination table. Yes, (D) is a normal symbol per determination table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a table | surface which shows the jackpot determination table for every game mode. It is a table | surface which shows the jackpot probability etc. for every game mode. It is a table | surface which shows a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of an initial setting process. It is a flowchart of a mode setting process. It is a flowchart of a mode confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a power-on notification process. It is a flowchart of an interruption process. It is a flowchart of a base display process. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol success / failure determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of the process during normal symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of a normal electric accessory process. It is a flowchart of special figure operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of special figure 2 determination processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 success / failure determination processing. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol confirmation process. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of a specific area sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of starting entrance. It is a flowchart of a power-off monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a mode setting monitoring process. It is a flowchart of a sub control main process. It is a flowchart of an initial process. It is a flowchart of a process when there is no setting change. It is a timing chart in initial processing. It is a figure which shows a setting alerting | reporting and board movable initial stage operation | movement. 10 is a flowchart of initial processing according to another aspect 1; 10 is a flowchart of initial processing according to another aspect 2; It is a timing chart in the initial processing of another mode. 10 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the second embodiment. FIG. 6 is a block diagram of a power supply board and the like according to a third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the third embodiment. 14 is a flowchart of power-on notification processing according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a block diagram of a power supply board and the like according to a fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of main control main processing according to a fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of mode setting processing according to the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of setting storage unit determination processing according to the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a base storage unit determination process according to the fifth embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing according to a fifth embodiment.

  Next, embodiments of the present invention will be described using examples. In the following, a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a winning game that can give a predetermined amount of gaming profit (for example, a prize ball) to a player when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the end of the variable display of the symbol. An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 attached in the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is configured to be detachable from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the gaming board 2 is removed from the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island facility of the hall. The front frame 51, the main body frame 52, and the outer frame 53 are pivotally supported on one side end side and can be opened and closed.

  In addition, the front frame 51 can supply a launching handle 60 for launching a game ball with a launch intensity corresponding to the operation amount (rotation angle) of the player and a game ball stored and stored to the launching device side. A ball hitting tray (upper pan) 61 and a surplus ball tray (lower pan) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting tray 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 includes a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by the player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. And simply referred to as “effect button 63”). The plurality of effect buttons can be used properly according to the type of game effect.

  The front frame 51 is provided with a movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) and a speaker 67, and the movable decorative member 17 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66. The movable total decorative member 17 is driven to rotate (with the back surface direction of the frame lamp 66 as a rotation axis) as a game effect or the like progresses, and the frame lamp 66 is lit in a predetermined lighting mode. Further, the movable decorative member 17 operates when a game effect (effect design variation effect) having a relatively high possibility of performing a big hit is executed. Further, the frame lamp 66 may indicate a high or low execution probability depending on the lighting mode. In addition, the movable decorative member 17 operates in a predetermined predetermined operation mode even during a big hit or in an initial operation described later. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the aspect of the first embodiment, and any input detection means (for example, the player directly touches the button portion to input) can be used as long as the input from the player can be detected. Or non-contact type input detection means (such as a photoelectric type) that detects and inputs that a part of the player's body is close Good. In the game board 2, a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down is surrounded by the rail member 4. The game board 2 is provided with a decorative board surface lamp 5. In the game area 3, a plurality of game nails 16 for guiding a game ball are projected. In addition, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, so that a game ball once guided to the game area can be prevented from returning to the launching device side.

  Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with an effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as an “effect symbol display unit”) in which effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (also simply referred to as “effect symbol 8”) are displayed. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R display a variation display in synchronization with a variation display of a first special symbol and a variation display of a second special symbol, which will be described later. The effect symbol display area 7b includes, for example, three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The left symbol display area displays the left effect symbol 8L, and the middle symbol display area displays the medium effect. The symbol 8C is displayed, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right.

  Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. The left, middle, and right effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area 7b are displayed on a first special symbol display 41a (also referred to as “first special symbol display unit”) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol and the result of the variable display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as “second special symbol display unit”) (that is, the special symbol validity determination) (Simply “success / failure determination”) are displayed so that the player can easily recognize them. It should be noted that any of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the production symbol may be simply referred to as “symbol” or “identification information”.

  For example, if the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a big hit, the effect symbol can be stopped and displayed with the same third digit such as “777” (also referred to as “hit effect symbol”). In addition, in the case of a small hit, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with a preset chance symbol such as “135” or a special symbol such as “3 * 3” (also referred to as “small hit effect symbol”) It is. Also, in the event of a loss, it is possible to stop and display the effect symbol with a rosette symbol (also referred to as a “delayed effect symbol”) in which at least one of the three symbols such as “637” and “373” is different. Is possible.

  Thereby, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the effect symbols that are stopped and displayed. That is, the player generally does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol success / failure determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, Grasp the effect symbols displayed in the symbol display area 7b. The positions of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas do not need to be separately provided, and the display areas of the left, middle, and right effect symbols may be the entire symbol display area (effect symbol display area 7b). . In addition, as a variation display mode of the effect symbol, for example, there is a mode in which scroll display is performed in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like.

  On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying the above-described game effects using the effect symbols (effect symbol game effects), the hit game effects to be executed along with the hit games, Demo production etc. are displayed. In the effect symbol game effect, the hit game effect, and the demonstration effect, in addition to effect symbols such as numbers, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed.

  The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying a first effect hold 9a in accordance with the number of first special figure hold to be described later. There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) for displaying the second effect hold 9b according to the number of second special figure hold to be described later. Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first effect hold or the second effect hold, the stored number and the second feature of the first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The stored number of the second special figure hold displayed on the figure hold indicator 43b can be easily shown to the player.

  A center decorative body 10 is provided in the vicinity of the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. A stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll is provided below the center decorative body 10. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decorative body 10. The warp unit 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet. The warp flowing down the game area 3 is received from the warp inlet, and the game ball is discharged from the warp outlet and guided to the stage unit 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage unit 11 can enter the first start port 20 described later with a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage unit 11. Further, on the upper part of the center decorative body 10, there is an electric decoration member (board surface lamp 5) such as an LED, which can be turned on according to the gaming state, and a decoration member 13 that is shaped like a character or a figure is arranged. Yes.

  In addition, a movable decorative member 14 that is operable in accordance with a game effect is provided at the upper part of the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. For example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward in accordance with the execution of a game effect that is relatively likely to hit, and the movable decorative member 14 is movable. The decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the decorative member 14 is visible.

  As a result, the player increases the sense of expectation for winning. Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 having a non-variable first start port 20 that does not change the ease of entering a game ball is provided. A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the first starting port 20, and if a predetermined condition is established, whether or not the first special symbol is true (first special symbol true / false) When the determination) is executed, the first special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the determination result.

  Below the first start opening 20, there is provided a variable winning device 22 (also referred to as "variable start opening") having a variable second start opening 21 for changing the ease of entering a game ball. . A random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is obtained based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and if a predetermined condition is established, whether or not the second special symbol is determined (second special symbol determination) ) Is executed, the second special symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the determination result. The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 and opens and closes the second start port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23.

  By this opening / closing operation, the second start port 21 can be changed from the first mode (closed state) to the second mode (open state) in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first mode. is there. The movable member 23 is driven by a second start port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 allows the game ball to enter only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and prevents the game ball from entering when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. Yes. The second starting port 21 is completely open when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the movable member 23 is in the open state. It may not be impossible to enter the ball.

  On the right side of the first start opening 20 in the game area 3, there is provided a first big winning device 31 (also referred to as a “first variable pitch opening”) having a first big winning opening 30. The first grand prize winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and opens / closes the first grand prize winning opening 30 by the operation of the opening / closing member 32. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by a first big prize opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The first grand prize opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, the first variable entrance 31 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 32 so that the game ball cannot enter (closed state) and the game ball can enter (open state). And can be changed.

  Further, in the game area 3 above the first big prize opening 30 and at the lower right part of the center decorative body 10, a second big prize winning device 36 ("second variable ball entry" having a second big prize opening 35 is provided. Is also provided). The second grand prize winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member (blade member) 37, and opens and closes the second big prize winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by a second big prize opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5). The second big winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. In other words, the second variable entrance 36 is in an inaccessible state (closed state) in which a game ball cannot enter and in an enterable state (open state) in which a game ball can enter by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37. And can be changed.

  In addition, the second grand prize winning device 36 identifies a specific area 39 and a non-specific area 49 through which a game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 35 can pass and a game ball that has entered the second major prize opening 35. The movable piece 150 is configured to be guided (sorted) to the area 39 or the non-specific area 49. The movable piece 150 is driven by a movable piece solenoid 151 (see FIG. 5). The movable piece 150 is triggered by the opening of the second big prize opening 35, in other words, the opening operation of the opening / closing member 37. Operation starts. When the movable piece solenoid 151 is OFF, that is, when the movable piece 150 is not in operation (non-operating state), the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35 is guided to the non-specific area 49 and the specific area. It is impossible to pass 39.

  On the other hand, when the movable piece solenoid 151 is ON, that is, when the movable piece 150 is operating (operating state), the game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35 is guided to the specific area 39, and the specific area 39 can be passed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a high probability state described later is generated based on the detection that at least one of the game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening 35 has passed the specific area 39. . That is, the specific area 39 is a probability changing operation port. Such a specific area 39 is not provided in the first big prize winning device 31.

  A gate 28 (game ball passage opening) through which a game ball can pass is provided in the right region of the center decorative body 10 in the game region 3. Based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is obtained is obtained. When a predetermined condition is established, it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is opened. When the symbol success / failure determination is executed, the normal symbol is variably displayed, and is stopped and displayed based on the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination. When the winning normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the second start port 21 is opened.

  Furthermore, a plurality of general entrances 27 are provided in the lower part of the game area 3. In this way, the game area 3 in which various entrances are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. , Can be divided into The hitting method in which the game ball is fired so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is referred to as left strike, and the strike method in which the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B so as to flow down is referred to as right strike. . In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game starts, the left strike is aimed at entering the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the winning / unjudging determination is based on the winning at the first starting port 20 and the gaming state has changed, the gate 28, the second starting port 21, the first big winning port 30, and the second The goal is to enter the big prize opening 35. When a game ball enters the first starting port, the second starting port, the first major winning port, the second major winning port, and the general winning port, the predetermined starting point is set in advance. A number of game balls (also called “prize balls”) are paid out.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board 2. The main display 40 has a first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) that displays the first special symbol in a variable manner and stops, and a second special symbol display that displays the second special symbol in a variable manner and stopped. 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display unit 42 (normal symbol display unit) for variably displaying and stopping the normal symbol. In addition, the main indicator 40 includes a first special figure hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored decision determination information (first special figure hold) related to the first special symbol, and the determination information (second display) related to the second special symbol. 2nd special figure hold display 43b for displaying the number of stored 2 special figure hold), and a general figure hold display 44 for displaying the number of stored operation (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42 is included. ing.

  Further, the main indicator 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second special symbol success / failure determination is a hit (specific result), the first special symbol success / failure determination or the second When the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is a win, the round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, the gaming state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and the launch of the game ball A firing direction indicator 47 is included that indicates the direction, i.e., whether to strike right or left. Various displays included in the main display 40 are display-controlled by a main controller described later.

  The change display of the first special symbol is performed when a game ball enters the first start port 20 as an opportunity. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed when a game ball enters the second start port 21 as an opportunity. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. The first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. In addition, the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure hold display unit 43.

  In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed. The special symbol (stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21. The result of lottery based on (special symbol success / failure determination, big hit lottery) is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols based on the special symbol success / failure determination. If the stop symbol is a predetermined special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, if it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), the release pattern corresponding to the type of the specific special symbol that is stopped is displayed. A special game (a big hit game, a small hit game) for opening the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 is performed. In addition, the opening pattern of the special winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41 a is configured by eight LEDs indicated by “i to p”, and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is displayed. indicate. For example, if the result of the first special symbol success / failure determination is the first result (15R big hit), the three “ijn” LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the second result (2R big hit) is reached, the four LEDs “jnkl” are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the third result (small hit) is obtained, the four LEDs “mnop” are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, in the case of detachment, the two “lo” LEDs can be turned on and the rest can be turned off.

  The second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by “a to h”, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination. The stop display mode is set to a different display mode according to the result of the second special symbol success / failure determination, as in the first special symbol display 41b. In addition, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, that light repeatedly flows from left to right in a predetermined order. In this manner, each LED can be turned on.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, various information (“acquired information”) such as a special symbol success / failure determination random number or the like based on the received ball. The acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special diagram storage unit 85 a as the first special diagram reservation, and if it is the ball entering the second starting port 21, the second special diagram is stored. It is stored in the second special figure storage unit 85b as a hold. An upper limit is set for the number of (undigested) special figure holds that can be stored in each special figure storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The first special figure storage unit 85a and the second special figure storage unit 85b are also referred to as “first acquisition information storage unit” and “second acquisition information storage unit”, respectively, and are also referred to as “acquisition information storage unit”. .

  The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when it is possible to display a special symbol based on the special figure hold. Special figure reservation is a special for determining the special symbol success / failure random numbers etc. corresponding to the special figure hold (whether it is a big hit / small hit / out or big hit type) and showing the result of the determination This refers to executing a variable display of symbols. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the change display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 cannot be executed immediately at the time of entering, that is, the change of the special symbol Even when the display is being executed or the special game is being executed, the right to determine whether or not the special symbol is appropriate for the ball can be reserved up to a predetermined number.

  The number of special figure hold is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two “uv” LEDs, and the first special figure is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold. The number of holds is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, “u □ v □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit) is set so that both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode in which the u LED is turned off and the v LED is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”, can be used. Further, when the number of holdings is 2, a display mode in which the u LED is lit in red and the v LED is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. In addition, when the number of holds is 3, it is possible to adopt a display mode in which both LEDs are lit in red, such as “u ● v ●”.

  Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be lit in green as “u ▲ v ▲” to make a display mode. The second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs “wx”, and the second special figure hold is controlled by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special figure hold. The number is displayed. For example, when the number of holds is 0, the display mode is to turn off both LEDs such as “w □ x □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit). 4 is also determined in the same manner as the first special figure holding display 43a.

  The normal symbol variation display is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, and then the stop symbol is displayed. The result of the normal symbol success / failure determination based on the passing of the game ball to the gate 28 is displayed based on the stopped normal symbol (stop symbol). Inform. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the normal symbol determination. If the stopped normal symbol is a predetermined specific symbol (a normal symbol), an auxiliary game is performed in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the current gaming state. The opening pattern of the second start port 21 will be described later.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two “st” LEDs, and displays a normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination according to the lighting mode. It is. For example, if the determination result is a win, the normal symbol that is turned on when both LEDs are lit is stopped and displayed, such as “s t” (for example, ■: lighted, □: lighted off). If the determination result is out of place, an out-of-order normal symbol is displayed in a state where only the t LED is lit, such as “s □ t ■”. Note that the removed normal symbol is not a specific normal symbol. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol variation display is executed for a predetermined variation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off. is there.

  In this pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes to the gate 28, various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is obtained based on the passage, and the acquired various information Is temporarily stored as a general map reservation in a general map storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit. An upper limit is set for the number of pending map holds that can be stored in the pending map storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four.

  The general map reservation stored in the general map storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the general map storage becomes possible. The digestion of the general symbol hold means that the normal symbol validity determination random number corresponding to the general symbol hold is determined, and the normal symbol variation display for indicating the determination result is executed. Accordingly, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal symbol variation display based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be immediately executed, that is, when the normal symbol variation display is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed. Even so, with the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to reserve the right to determine whether or not it is a normal symbol for the passage. The number of the general map hold is displayed on the general map hold display 44.

  Specifically, the general map hold indicator 44 is composed of two “qr” LEDs, and displays the number of general map holds by turning on the LED according to the number of general map holds. is there. For example, when the number of hold is 0, “q □ r □” (for example, □: unlit, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), both LEDs are turned off, and the number of held is 1 In this case, a display mode can be adopted in which the q LED is turned off and the r LED is lit in red, such as “q □ r ●”. Also, the number of holds 2 to 4 is determined in the same manner as the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

  Next, based on FIG.2 and FIG.5, the electrical structure in this pachinko game machine 1 is demonstrated. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a main control board 80 (also referred to as a “main control unit”) that performs control related to game profits such as special symbol success / failure determination, normal symbol success / failure determination, and game state transition. )), A sub-control board 90 (also referred to as “sub-control unit”, also referred to as “effect control unit”) that performs control related to effects executed as the game progresses, and payout control that performs control related to game ball payout Substrate 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”), effect symbol 8 displayed on image display device 7, symbol displayed on effect indicator 102, first effect hold indicator 103a, second effect hold indicator 103b, etc. An image control board 100 (also referred to as an “image control unit”) or the like that performs display control is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case storing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and above the main control board case. Is provided with an image control board storage case containing the audio control board 106, the lamp control board 107 and the image control board 100, and a sub control board storage containing the sub control board 90 on the image control board storage case. A case is provided. Further, a payout control board case for storing the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for storing the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

  A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from other boards via an input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may be externally attached. In the RAM of the game control microcomputer 81, the special figure reservation storage unit 85 (the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b), the general figure reservation storage unit 86, and the power supply voltage are reduced. A backup area 161 (also referred to as “main control backup area”) that stores and holds information (also referred to as “gaming state information”) indicating the gaming state at that time is provided when it is detected (when power is cut off). Yes. This backup area 161 is a save area for storing predetermined game state information to be backed up among the information stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80 for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped. It is. When the power supply is resumed, it is possible to restore (restore) a predetermined gaming state when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected based on the gaming state information stored and held in the backup area 161. . These processes are also referred to as “game state information recovery means”.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control board 80 includes a probability of determining a big hit, a probability of determining a small hit, and a big hit in the first special symbol success / failure determination and the second special symbol success / failure determination. A “mode setting switch 82” is provided that can change the probability of determining the jackpot type when it is determined from the outside by a predetermined input operation. As shown in FIG. 6, the “mode setting switch 82” is a slide type switch whose setting can be switched in five stages. In addition, a game shop clerk (mode setting person, probability setting person) slides the operation part 82a of the mode setting switch 82 leftward or rightward (performs a predetermined input operation) under a specific condition described later. It is possible to select an arbitrary game mode. In FIG. 6, it is assumed that the operation unit 82 a is placed at a position where “game mode 3” is selected, and the game mode is set to “game mode 3”.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an arbitrary game mode can be selected from five types of game modes by an input operation to the mode setting switch 82. As five types of game modes, a game mode 1, a game mode 2, a game mode 3, a game mode 4, and a game mode 5 are provided. In FIG. 6, the game mode can be set to the game mode 1 by positioning the operation portion 82 a at the leftmost setting position (position [1]) of the mode setting switch 82. In addition, the game mode can be set to the game mode 2 by positioning the operation unit 82a at the second setting position (position [2]) from the left of the mode setting switch 82. Further, the operation mode 82a is positioned at the third setting position ([3] position) from the left of the mode setting switch 82, so that the game mode can be set to the game mode 3 (FIG. 6). Setting mode). In addition, the game mode can be set to the game mode 4 by positioning the operation unit 82a at the second setting position (position [4]) from the right of the mode setting switch 82. Further, the operation mode 82a is positioned at the rightmost setting position ([5] position) of the mode setting switch 82, so that the game mode can be set to the game mode 5 (see FIG. 6). .

  Further, the game mode can be set to any game mode of the setter by moving (positioning) the operation unit 82a of the mode setting switch 82 to any set position. The setting state of the mode setting switch 82, that is, the position of the operation unit 82 a is monitored by the CPU of the main control board 80, and the position of the operation unit 82 a of the mode setting switch 82 (selected by the operator) is monitored by the CPU. Selected information indicating the played game mode). When an operator such as a game store clerk performs a predetermined input operation on the mode setting switch 82 in order to change the game mode and the selection information is changed, the CPU of the main control board 80 controls the predetermined control described later. To determine whether the change condition is satisfied (determine whether the operation was performed under a specific condition), and if satisfied, set the game mode corresponding to the selected information (change the mode) and satisfy If not, the game mode corresponding to the selection information is not set (the mode is not changed). The means for setting (changing the setting of) the game mode when this change condition is satisfied is also referred to as “determination probability setting means”. The mode setting switch 82 (including the operation unit 82a and the like) is also referred to as “determination probability selection means”, and information indicating the position (selected setting) selected by the mode setting switch 82 is “selection information”. Also called.

  Here, each game mode (game mode 1 to game mode 5) will be described with reference to FIG. When the game mode is set to “game mode 1”, the jackpot probability (the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol success / failure determination and the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol success / failure determination) is low. 1/630 in the probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in the high probability state. The small hit probability is 1/160 for both the first special symbol success / failure determination and the second special symbol success / failure determination. In addition, the big hit type (big hit type determination determination) when the first special symbol is determined to be big hit is the ratio of 15% first big hit 40%, 15R second big hit 50%, 2R third big hit 10% It is distributed by. The jackpot type determination random number is composed of 100 values from 0 to 99, and any value is acquired at the timing of entering the starting port (the first starting port or the second starting port). The jackpot type is determined. The big hit type (big hit type determination determination) when the big special hit is determined in the second special symbol success / failure determination is such that 15R fourth big hit is 100%. That is, if it is determined that the second special symbol win / loss determination is a big hit, it will always be a 15R fourth big hit. The jackpot probability is also referred to as “determination probability”.

  Next, when the game mode is set to “gaming mode 2”, the jackpot probability (the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol success / failure determination and the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol success / failure determination) Is 1/315 in the low probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in the high probability state. Other conditions are the same as in game mode 1. Next, when the game mode is set to “gaming mode 3”, the jackpot probability (the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol success / failure determination and the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol success / failure determination) Is 1/210 in the low probability state (normal state) and 1/63 in the high probability state. Other conditions are the same as in game mode 1. When these game modes 1 to 3 are compared, the big hit probability (the so-called first hit probability) in the low probability state is different, and the game mode 3 is the most advantageous for the player, and then the game mode 2 The game mode 3 is the most unfavorable game mode for the player.

  Next, when the game mode is set to “gaming mode 4”, the jackpot probability (the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the first special symbol success / failure determination and the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the second special symbol success / failure determination) Is 1/315 in the low probability state (normal state) and 1/42 in the high probability state. The small hit probability is 1/90 for both the first special symbol success / failure determination and the second special symbol success / failure determination. In addition, the big hit type (big hit type determination determination) when the first special symbol is determined to be a big hit is 30% for the 15R first big hit, 60% for the 15R second big hit, and 10% for the 2R third big hit. It is distributed by. In this game mode 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is the same probability as the game mode 2, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/42, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is the highest in the game mode. Has been. As will be described later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment makes a special symbol success / failure determination a predetermined number of times in a high probability state, and shifts to a low probability state when it is not determined to be a big hit ( The so-called “ST machine” is a specification referred to as a “probable variation number cut gaming machine”). Therefore, the game mode 4 is considered to have the highest possibility that the next jackpot will occur in a high probability state, as compared to other game modes. That is, this game mode 4 can be said to be a setting (game mode) that is least likely to end the high probability state without generating a big hit.

  On the other hand, in the determination of the big hit type, it is set to be disadvantageous compared to other game modes. Specifically, in the jackpot type determination at the time of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the ratio of 15R first jackpot that is highly likely to receive a privilege (high probability state) is higher than in other game modes The ratio of the 15R second big hit that is set low and the possibility that the privilege (high probability state) is given is set higher than the other game modes. As a result, in the game mode 4, there is a high possibility that the next big hit will occur in the high probability state, but the possibility that the high probability state will continue based on the big hit is low.

  Next, when the game mode is set to “game mode 5”, the jackpot probability (probability determined to be a big hit in the first special symbol success / failure determination and probability determined to be a big hit in the second special symbol success / failure determination) Is 1/315 in the low probability state (normal state) and 1/90 in the high probability state. The small hit probability is 1/210 for both the first special symbol success / failure determination and the second special symbol success / failure determination. In addition, the big hit type (big hit type determination determination) when the big special hit is determined in the first special symbol success / failure determination is the ratio of 15% first big hit 50%, 15R second big hit 40%, 2R third big hit 10% It is distributed by. In this game mode 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is the same probability as the game mode 2, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/90, and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is the lowest in the game mode. Has been. Therefore, this game mode 5 is least likely to cause the next big hit in the high probability state as compared with other game modes, and may end the high probability state without generating the big hit. This is the highest setting. On the other hand, in the determination of the big hit type, it is advantageously set as compared with other game modes. Specifically, in the jackpot type determination at the time of the first special symbol success / failure determination, the ratio of 15R first jackpot that is highly likely to receive a privilege (high probability state) is higher than in other game modes It is set high, and the rate of 15R second big hit that is unlikely to receive a privilege (high probability state) is set lower than other game modes. As a result, in game mode 5, there is a low possibility that the next big hit will occur in the high probability state, but if the big hit is reached, the possibility that the high probability state will continue based on the big hit is high. ing.

  In this way, it has an unfavorable game mode and an advantageous game mode compared to others, and the probability of jackpot in the high probability state (in the privilege grant state) is high, but the high probability state is in the case of a big hit A game mode that has a low possibility of being continued (possibility to receive a privilege again) or a game mode that has a low probability of being a big hit in a high probability state but is highly likely to continue in a high probability state Various game modes that can accommodate various player preferences are provided. Thereby, a player who selects a gaming machine selects a predetermined gaming machine and plays a game in the hope that the gaming machine is set to his / her favorite gaming mode. In addition, the game modes 1 to 3, the game mode 4, and the game mode 5 have different small hit probabilities, so that the player is set by counting the number of small hit occurrences during the game. It is possible to guess to some extent the game mode that is being played. Thereby, the player can estimate whether or not the gaming machine being played is set to a desired game mode, and can use it as an index for continuing the game. As a result, it is possible to give a new gaming interest and enhance the gaming interest.

  Further, in these game modes, it is possible to change some or all of aspects such as the displayed identification information (effect symbol), the appearing character, and the reach effect (character effect). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored of the game and to improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, etc., the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment corresponds to the main control board 80, the payout control board 110, other control boards (sub control board 90, image control board 100), and the like. A power supply substrate 109 for supplying driving power is provided. The power supply board 109 is provided with a power supply unit 104 for supplying drive power to each control board and the like, and a voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 for monitoring a drop in power supply voltage supplied to the power supply board. ing. In addition, a predetermined operation (ON by pressing the left side and OFF by pressing the right side) is performed on the power supply board 109 as a switch for a game shop clerk to perform a predetermined input operation. A power switch 84 that can start or stop the supply of power supply voltage, a backup area provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 by performing a predetermined input operation, and a backup provided in the RAM of the payout control unit 110 And a RAM clear switch 83 that erases and initializes the stored contents of the area. The power supply substrate 109 is also referred to as “power supply means”. Further, the power supply substrate 109 may be composed of a single substrate or a plurality of substrates. The same applies to the main control board 80, the payout control board 110, the sub control board 90, and other control boards.

  When power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (power OFF state), if only the power switch 84 is turned ON, the power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply board 109 and the power supply board 109 to various control boards. Necessary driving power is supplied. When the game state information when the power is turned off (when power is reduced) is normally stored (stored) in the backup area, the game when the power is turned off (when power is reduced) based on the gaming state information. After recovering the state, it is set in a game-ready state (this is also referred to as “game state information recovery means”). On the other hand, when the power switch 84 is turned on while the RAM clear switch 83 is pressed for a predetermined period while the power switch 84 is turned on, the input information (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch from the power board 109 is the main control. If there is game state information that is input to the unit 80 and the payout control unit 110 and stored in the backup area (the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit 110), the stored game state information is erased and initialized. Thus, a game-ready state is set (also referred to as “game state information initializing means”). Thereby, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be initialized to the initial state.

  When the stored game state information is erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the game state information excluding the specific game state information (the deletion target game state information) from the stored game state information. ) May be deleted. The game state information that is not erased by the RAM clear (initialization) operation is referred to as “specific game state information”. The “specific game state information” is, for example, a base value (first base value, second base value) to be described later, which can be used to check the operating status of the gaming machine or to be used by a third party (police, inspection organization, etc.). This is game information used when inspecting a gaming machine. In addition, other game state information (for example, unpaid prize ball information, state information (probability / short time / big hit), game mode information, error information, etc.) is to be deleted by a RAM clear (initialization) operation. .

  In addition, the voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC24V, DC12V, DC5V, etc.) used in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the monitored voltage value is reduced to a predetermined value. Then (when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected), a “power-off signal” indicating that is output to the CPU of the main control unit 80, the CPU of the payout control unit 110, and the like (see FIG. 6). . In addition, the CPU of the main control board 80 and the CPU of the payout control board 110 that have received the power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 109 store and hold game state information stored in the respective RAMs in a backup area, which will be described later. Perform the power-off monitoring process. Here, in the RAM of the main control board 80 and the RAM of the payout control board 110, the storage area for storing the game state information during the game is also referred to as “game state information storage means”, and when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected. A backup area for storing game state information to be backed up is also referred to as “memory holding means”.

  Further, a part or all of the RAM of the main control board 80 and the RAM of the payout control board 110 is used as a backup area, and is backed up by a backup power supply (backup voltage) included in the power supply unit of the power supply board 109. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power OFF operation, these RAMs are used for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The contents (gaming state information) of the backup target (memory retention target) stored in is saved (stored). The game state information includes at least information indicating the set game mode (game mode information), data indicating the game state (state information), that is, data corresponding to the control state of the main control unit (special symbol status) Flag, normal symbol status flag, hold memory counter value, probability variation flag, hourly flag, etc.), data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls (unpaid prize ball information), and the like.

  These game state information is stored (stored) in a backup area (backup RAM) in which power supply is maintained by a backup power source. In addition, “data according to the control state of the main control unit” means that after a power failure or the like occurs and the power supply is started again, the control state (game state) is changed to a power failure or the like. This data is necessary to restore the control state (game state) at the time (before the occurrence of a power failure). Although not shown, a backup area is provided in the RAM of the sub-control unit 90 similarly to the main control unit 80 and the like, and the game state information ( The number of reserved memories, prefetch information, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.) can be stored and retained, and the contents of the backup area of the RAM may be saved for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the main control board 80 is provided with (mounted on) a mode setting lock unit 89 for enabling the above-described change of the game mode setting. As described above, a game store clerk or the like slides the operation portion 82a of the mode setting switch 82 leftward or rightward (by performing a predetermined input operation) to select an arbitrary game mode. It is necessary to operate the mode setting lock unit 89. Although details will be described later, at least one of setting the mode setting lock unit 89 to ON by inserting a setting key (not shown) into the insertion unit 89a of the mode setting lock unit 89 and operating (rotating) the setting key. As one condition, the game mode can be changed. Note that the state in which the longitudinal direction of the insertion portion 89a is vertical (shown by a solid line in FIG. 6) is set to OFF. When the setting key is inserted into the insertion part 89a in this OFF state and the setting key is rotated 90 degrees rightward (a predetermined amount in one direction), the longitudinal direction of the insertion part 89a becomes horizontal (the broken line in FIG. 6). ). This state is the ON state.

  The game mode can be changed with at least one condition of being in the ON state. The mode setting lock unit 89 is connected to the CPU of the main control unit 80 on the main control board 80, and the CPU of the main control unit 80 is in the ON state or the OFF state of the mode setting lock unit 89. It is possible to determine (identify) when the mode setting lock unit 89 is turned on, when it is turned off, and the like. In addition, when the mode setting lock unit 89 is turned on and the setting of the game mode is changed (including the case where the mode is not changed), the setting key is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise (a predetermined amount in the other direction) to be initialized. By returning to the position (OFF position), the setting change operation of the game mode is completed, and the gaming machine is set to a “gameable state” in which the player can play.

  In the present embodiment, when the setting key is inserted into the insertion section 89a, the inserted setting key cannot be removed at the ON position, but can be removed only at the OFF position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game store clerk or the like from finishing the setting change work while the mode setting lock unit 89 is in the OFF state and leaving the gaming machine in the “non-gameable state” as much as possible. In the present embodiment, the main control unit 80 is sealed (configured so that it cannot be opened without being broken) in a state of being housed in the main control board case. Then, from this main control board case, only the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock part 89 and its peripheral part are exposed, and a setting key can be inserted into the insertion part 89a from the outside of the main control board case. Yes. That is, the game mode setting can be changed in a state where the main control board case is sealed (closed). The setting key can be removed from the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock portion 89 only in the OFF position, but can be inserted only in the OFF position. That is, the setting key can be inserted into and removed from the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock part 89 only at the OFF position.

  The main control board 80 is provided with (implemented) an information display unit 88 (also referred to as “game information display unit”) for displaying predetermined game information at a predetermined timing (for a predetermined period). ing). As shown in FIG. 6, this information display unit 88 has four LED indicators (a first information display unit 88a, a second information display unit 88b, a third information display unit 88c, a first information display unit) on the main control board 80. 4 information display portions 88d) are arranged adjacent to each other in the horizontal direction (mounted). In addition, each LED display has a 7-segment display and a dot display, and display control can be performed by combining these 4 LED displays. It has become. The information display unit 88 displays a game mode set by the above-described “determination probability setting means” and a case where a base value (first base value, second base value) described later is displayed. is there. When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started (when power is turned on), all display units (LED display units) constituting the information display unit 88 are displayed in a predetermined display mode for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). For example, all of the four information display sections (88a, 88b, 88c, 88d) (7 segments + 8 display sections with dots) are blinked (for example, lit for 0.5 seconds, 0.5 (Second turn-off is repeatedly executed). By confirming the initial display mode when the power is turned on, it is possible to confirm whether or not the display unit (32 units in total) constituting the information display unit 88 has any failure or malfunction. Further, in order to facilitate confirmation, it is desirable to perform display control of the same display mode for all the display units at substantially the same timing.

  Further, it is assumed that the information display unit 88 is always in a display state for displaying some game information after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the game mode display state ("game mode change state", "game mode confirmation state") is displayed from the time the power is turned on until the game is ready, and the game mode is displayed. When the game is enabled, a base display state for displaying a base value to be described later is set. That is, it is assumed that no game information is displayed, that is, it is not turned off. This makes it possible to always display some game information according to the state of the gaming machine, and to quickly and reliably grasp the game information. In addition, by touching the information display unit 88 in a state where no game information is displayed, it is possible to recognize that the information display unit 88, the control unit that controls the display, wiring, or the like has some failure or malfunction. Thus, it becomes possible to quickly repair and take measures. In addition, when a plurality of stored base values such as the first base value and the second base value (all of them) are out of the reference base value range described in the gaming machine manual or the like, A manufacturer or the like can be inquired that some trouble has occurred in a nail or a game part. This also reduces the possibility of unforeseen disadvantages.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include an out sensor 29, a first start opening sensor 20a, a second start opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, and a specific area sensor. 39a and a general entrance sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as “detecting means”.

  The out sensor 29 is for counting the number (total number) of game balls launched into the game area, and enters all game balls launched into the game area 3, that is, any of the entrances. Thus, all of the game balls discharged out of the gaming machine and the game balls discharged out of the gaming machine through the out port without entering any of the entrances are detected. Therefore, it is provided below the out port 18 provided in the lowermost part of the game area 3. The out sensor may be provided on the game board 2 or on the gaming machine frame 50. It is paid out based on the total number of outs counted by the out sensor 29 (the total number of effective launch balls) and the entrance to the entrance (first start port 20, second start port 21, general entrance 27). Based on the total number of winning balls, a base value to be described later is calculated and displayed on the information display section 88 described above. Here, the counting means for counting the number of outs may be referred to as “first counting means”, and the means for counting the number of winning balls may be referred to as “second counting means”.

  The first start port sensor 20 a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21 a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28 a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first grand prize opening sensor 30 a is provided in the first big prize opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first big prize opening 30. The second grand prize opening sensor 35 a is provided in the second big prize opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 in the second big prize opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39 among the game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 35. is there. The non-specific area sensor 49a is provided in the non-specific area 49 in the second big prize opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 49 among the game balls that have entered the second big prize opening 35. To do. The general entrance sensor 27 a is provided in each of the general entrances 27 to detect a game ball that has entered the general entrance 27.

  Further, as the solenoids, a second start opening solenoid 24, a first large winning opening solenoid 33, a second large winning opening solenoid 38 and a movable piece solenoid 151 are connected. These various solenoids are also referred to as “driving means”. The second start opening solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22, and the first big winning port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. is there. The second big prize winning solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second big prize winning device 36, and the movable piece solenoid 151 is for driving the movable piece 150 of the second big prize winning device 36. is there. Further, the main control board 80 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special diagram hold indicator 43a, a second special figure hold indicator 43b, a general diagram. A hold indicator 44, a round indicator 45, a game state indicator 46, a firing direction indicator 47, and a hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, display control of these main display devices 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. On the payout control board 110, a payout device 120 for paying out winning balls and balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like are stored. And a launching device 112 are connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as “launch control unit”). The firing device 112 includes a firing handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

  The payout control board 110 is mounted with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as “payout control microcomputer”) that controls the payout of the game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 controls the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. Drives to pay out prize balls and pays out balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the launch device 112, the touch sensor 114 detects the player's contact with the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 rotates the launch handle 60. Detect the amount. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

  The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that can only transmit signals from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer 91 (“effect control microcomputer”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling a game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. Yes. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The ROM may be externally attached.

  The sub control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 displays an image on the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The display control of the device 7, the effect display 102, the first effect hold display 103a, and the second effect hold display 103b is performed. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. In the ROM of the image control board 100, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, holding symbols, etc.) And image data such as background images. The CPU of the image control board 100 reads the image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, display control is executed based on the read image data.

  The production indicator 102 is composed of two LEDs, and performs a fluctuation display and a stop display in accordance with a fluctuation display and a stop display of the production symbol 8, and the production symbols are displayed by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining the colors. 8 is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the display result of 8 (result of special symbol success / failure determination). Similarly, the first effect hold indicator 103a and the second effect hold indicator 103b are also composed of two LEDs. Then, by turning on and off the two LEDs, or by a combination of colors, the first effect hold display 103a is displayed with the number of hold displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. Display control is performed in a display mode that indicates the same number of held as the number of held. Further, the second effect hold display device 103b is display-controlled in a display mode that indicates the hold number displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the hold number displayed on the second special figure hold display device 43b. The This is because the character symbol is displayed on substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display portion), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated to substantially represent the entire effect symbol display area 7b (effect symbol display portion) of the display screen 7a. Such a display is provided because a part or all of the effect design, the first effect hold display unit, or the second effect hold display unit may not be visible by covering. . Note that a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effect, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as sound output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute sound control. Further, in this case, acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, emits light pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinction, light emission color, etc.) for determining the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. , Lamp data) is determined from data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 91 drives an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on a command received from the main control board 80 to move the decorative member. 14 and 17 are operated. The movable decorative member 14 (also referred to as “panel movable portion” or “first movable member”) is a movable so-called gimmick provided in the center decorative body 10. The movable decorative member 17 (also referred to as “frame movable portion” or “second movable member”) is an operation pattern data for the effect control microcomputer 91 to operate the movable decorative members 14 and 17 in a predetermined operation mode. (Also referred to as “driving data”) is determined from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and the operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. Note that a CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

  The sub-control board 90 is connected to an origin sensor 14b that detects that the movable decorative member 14 is at the start position (initial state), that is, at the origin. The origin sensor 14b constitutes a movable decorative unit together with the movable decorative member 14, and as shown by a broken line in FIG. 3, the movable decorative member 14 is at the start position after the decorative member 13 (back side). Sometimes it is provided so that its presence can be detected. When the movable decorative member 14 is at the start point position, the signal (origin sensor signal) input from the origin sensor 14b to the sub-control board 90 is ON, and when the movable decorative member 14 is not at the start position, the origin sensor signal is OFF. Become. The origin sensor 14b may be any sensor that can detect that the detection object is approaching without contact, and a photo sensor, a proximity sensor, or the like can be used.

  The sub-control board 90 is connected to an origin sensor 17b that detects that the movable decorative member 17 is at the start position (initial state), that is, at the origin. The origin sensor 17b constitutes a movable decorative unit together with the movable decorative member 17, and can detect the presence of the movable decorative member 17 when the movable decorative member 17 is at the start position, inside the movable decorative member 17. It is provided to become. When the movable decorative member 17 is at the start point position, a signal (origin sensor signal) input from the origin sensor 14b to the sub-control board 90 is turned on. When the movable decorative member 17 is not at the start point position, the origin sensor signal is turned off. Become. The origin sensor 17b may be any sensor that can detect that the detection object is approaching without contact, and a photo sensor, a proximity sensor, or the like can be used.

  Further, the sub control board 90 includes a first effect button detection switch 63c and a first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pressed, rotated, pulled, etc.). 2 effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output to the sub-control board 90 from the corresponding effect button detection switch.

  Next, control related to the determination of success / failure in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol success / failure determination, there are “big hit”, “small hit”, and “off”. In the case of “hit”, the “hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When “small hit” is selected, the “small hit symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. In addition, when it is “disengaged”, the “designated symbol” is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small win, a “special game” is executed to open the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35 with an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the special symbol displayed in a stopped state. . A special game executed as a big hit is called a “big hit game”, and a special game executed as a small hit is called a “small hit game”. Note that one or a plurality of special symbols may be provided as the types of special symbols to be stopped and displayed in “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out”.

  There are several types of jackpots. As shown in FIG. 7, the types of hits include “15R (round) first big hit”, “15R second big hit”, “2R third big hit”, and “15R fourth big hit”. “15R 1st big hit” and “15R 4th big hit” have 15 open times (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (first big prize opening 30 or second big prize opening 35). In the second round, this is a big hit that opens the second big prize opening 35 in such a manner that the game ball can pass (specifically) to the specific area 39 (also simply referred to as “V”). A round aimed at passing the game ball to the specific area 39 (a predetermined privilege is given when the game ball passes through the specific area) can be called a V round, a chance round, or a challenge round. The V round (specific round) is a round for operating the movable piece 150, and the round (non-specific round) other than the V round does not operate the movable piece 150. That is, even if the second grand prize winning opening 35 is a round other than the V round, the movable piece 150 does not operate and the specific area 39 is always closed. Even if the ball is paid into the second grand prize opening 35, the game ball is not guided to the specific area 39. That is, it can be said that rounds other than the V round are “a round in which a game ball cannot pass through a specific area”.

  In addition, “15R 2nd big hit” is 1 round which is the above-mentioned chance round, although the number of times of opening (number of rounds) of the big prize opening (the first big prize opening 30 or the second big prize opening 35) is 15 times. The opening time of the second and second rounds is extremely short (opening and closing for a moment), making it difficult to enter the second grand prize opening 35 and difficult to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 (as impossible) It is also a big hit. That is, the “15R second big hit” can be said to be a big hit that does not open the second big prize winning device 36 in a manner that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 (easy). "2R 3rd big hit" is the number of times (number of rounds) of opening the grand prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is 2 times, and in the first and second rounds, which are V rounds, respectively, Although there is no game ball, the game ball to the second big prize opening 35 is opened in such a manner that it can enter. Specifically, in each round, “0.9 s” is released once. In other words, the 2R third big hit is a big hit that opens the second big prize winning device 36 in such a manner that the game ball can pass to the specific area 39. However, since the opening time of the second grand prize opening 35 is 1.8 seconds even if the first round and the second round are combined, the game ball can pass to the specific area 39, but the 15R first big hit In addition, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area 39 is low.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, based on the passing of the game ball to the specific area 39 in the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game is shifted to a high probability state to be described later. Accordingly, when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is the above-mentioned 15R first big hit, 2R third big hit, or 15R fourth big hit, the possibility of passing the game ball to the specific area (15R second big hit and Since the first and second V rounds are executed in a relatively high manner (compared), the game state after the big hit game can be obtained by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the big hit game. Can be shifted to a high probability state. On the other hand, in the case of 15R second big hit, since the opening time of the first and second chance rounds is 0.1 seconds each, it is a V round, but the second big prize opening Since it is very difficult to enter the game ball into the game area, the game ball cannot be passed to the specific area 39 during execution of the big hit game, and the game state after the big hit game is a normal state described later. (Low probability state) is very likely (it may be said that it becomes a low probability state).

  On the other hand, the opening pattern of the small hit game executed when the small hit is made, the opening operation of opening the second big winning opening 35 over 0.9 seconds is performed twice (to enter the ball ready state). ) This small hit game opening pattern is apparently the same opening pattern as the 2R third big hit game, and it is difficult for the player to recognize whether it is a small hit game or a 2R big hit game. . Therefore, it is not possible to distinguish whether the hit game to be executed is a small hit game or a 2R big hit game only by looking at these opening patterns. That is, when a small hit is made, the second big winning device 36 is opened twice in such a manner that a game ball can enter the second big winning opening 35. However, since the movable piece 150 does not operate during the small hit game, even if a game ball enters the second large winning opening 35, the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39. Even if there is a game ball passing to the specific area 39 for some reason, an invalid period in which the passing of the specific area 39 (detection by the specific area sensor 39a) is not processed as valid in rounds other than the V round. Therefore, any privilege is not given based on the passage of the specific area 39.

  Therefore, the game state after the small hit game is not changed from before the small hit game is executed. For this reason, if the game state before the small hit game is in the normal state (low probability state), the game state after the small hit game is also in the normal state. From the viewpoint of the player, it is difficult to distinguish the 2R third big hit and the small hit from the open pattern of the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35). That is, it is difficult for the player to recognize from the opening pattern of the big winning opening whether the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is the 2R third big hit or the small hit. Also, in terms of performance, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the big hit game related to the 2R third big hit and the small hit game related to the small hit, and during the subsequent display of the variation of the production symbols. As described above, it is possible to execute a common effect (effect mode). Therefore, even if the game ball is passed to the specific area 39 during the special game as the 2R third big hit, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the subsequent game state has shifted to the high probability state. In addition, it is set as the structure which a player cannot visually recognize also about the operation | movement aspect of the movable piece 150 inside the 2nd big winning opening 35, or whether the game ball passed the specific area | region. As a result, in the case of a small hit, and in the case of 2R third big hit, the game with a sense of expectation that after the hit game (small hit game or big hit game) may be in a high probability state It is possible to progress the game, and it is possible to enhance the game entertainment. In addition, in the small hit, the number of times of opening the big winning opening is not called the number of rounds but simply called the number of times of opening.

  More specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the opening pattern of the big winning opening when each big hit and small hit is as shown in FIG. That is, when 15R first big hit (when the 15R first big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), and when 15R fourth big hit (when the second special symbol display 41b is displayed). When the 15R 4th big hit symbol is stopped and displayed), the 2nd big prize opening 35 is opened for up to 28 seconds from 1R to 2R, and the first big prize opening 30 is opened for up to 28 seconds from 3R to 15R. . At this time, since the opening times of the second big prize opening 35 at the 1R and 2R are 28 seconds, it is easy to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 during the round.

  In addition, when the 15R second big hit is achieved (when the 15R second big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the second big prize opening 35 is set to a maximum of 0.1 from 1R to 2R. The second grand opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 28 seconds from 3R to 15R. At this time, the opening time of the second grand prize winning opening 35 in the 1R and 2R is set to an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds at the maximum (instantaneous opening and closing). It is almost impossible to pass. That is, the opening pattern for 15R second big hit is different from the opening pattern for 15R first big hit in the opening mode of the first round and the second round. That is, at the 15R first big hit, the second big prize opening 35 is opened for 28 seconds in the first round and the second round which are V rounds, so that the game ball easily enters the second big prize opening 35. Since the movable piece 150 is also operating, the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 35 passes through the specific area 39 with a high possibility. On the other hand, in the 15R second big hit, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 second in the first round and the second round. For this reason, it is very difficult for a game ball to enter the second grand prize opening 35. Therefore, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 during execution of the 15R second big hit is considerably lower than that of the 15R first big hit. Further, the possibility that the game ball passes through the specific area 39 is as close to 0 as possible, so it may be said that the game ball does not pass through.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, when the 2R third big hit is reached (when the 2R third big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a), the 2R third big hit Each grand opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. At this time, since the opening time of the second grand prize opening 35, which is the sum of the first and second rounds, is 1.8 seconds at the maximum, a game ball enters the second big prize opening 35 during any round. Thus, it is possible to pass the game ball to the specific area 39 that is opened by the operation of the movable piece 150. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, one game ball is launched in about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, if the opening time of the second grand prize opening 35 is 1.8 seconds, it is possible to make the game ball enter the second big prize opening 35 sufficiently. In addition, since the total opening time of the second grand prize winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds, the 2R third big hit cannot expect as many prize balls (game profits) as the other 15R big hits. That is, it is a big hit that hardly wins a prize ball compared to other big hits (15R big hit).

  Also, when the first small hit is reached (when the first small symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a) and when the second small hit is reached (the second special symbol indicator 41b). In the case where the second small winning symbol is stopped and displayed), the second big winning opening 35 is opened twice for a maximum of 0.9 seconds. That is, the same big winning opening as the big winning opening to be opened in the big hit game of 2R third big hit is opened with the same opening pattern. In addition, the closing time between the first opening and the second opening in the small hit game, and the interval time of the first round and the second round in the 2R third big hit are set to the same time. As a result, it is difficult to distinguish the big hit game related to the 2R third big hit and the small hit game related to the small hit. In addition, even in this small hit, since the total opening time of the second grand prize opening 35 is 1.8 seconds at the maximum, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second big prize opening 35. However, as described above, since the small hit game does not have the V round, the movable piece 150 does not operate, and the game ball does not pass through the specific area 39. In addition, since the total opening time of the big winning opening is as short as 1.8 seconds, this small hit cannot expect as many prize balls as the 2R third big hit. That is, the small hits are those that have almost no special benefits for the player in terms of game state transition and prize balls (only prize balls by entering). That is, in this embodiment, as the opening pattern of the second grand prize opening 35, the first opening pattern that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 (easy to pass) (15 first big hit, 15R fourth big hit), The second opening pattern in which the game ball is difficult to pass (cannot pass) through the specific area 39 (15R second big hit), the game ball can pass through the specific area and is less likely to pass than the first open pattern 3 open patterns (2R third big hit, small hit).

  Note that, as described above, the probability of allocating to each jackpot in determining whether or not the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is correct is set corresponding to each game mode. In addition, the big hits in the determination of whether or not the second special symbol (special drawing 2) is correct are all 15R fourth big hits. In other words, if the winning / failing determination is based on the entry to the second starting port 21 that has been made easier to enter due to the operation of the opening extension function described later (occurrence of a high base state), the 15R fourth big hit must be made. It becomes. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second start port 21 has a larger hit than the big hit in the determination of whether or not the game ball is inserted into the first start port 20 (the first special symbol big hit lottery). It is set so that the possibility of winning a big hit in the winning / failing determination (second special symbol big hit lottery) performed by entering a game ball is higher for the player. That is, the player plays a game in anticipation of entering the second start port 21. This is particularly noticeable during the operation of the opening extension function in which the frequency of entering the second starting port 21 is increased.

  Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or missed is determined based on a “random symbol for determining whether or not to win a special symbol (also referred to as“ information for determining whether or not to win ”), resulting in a big hit. In this case, the determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on “a random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as“ symbol for determining symbols ”or“ information for determining symbols ”). Each of the special symbol success / failure determination and the jackpot type determination determination is also referred to as a “win / failure determination (determination)”, and may be generally referred to as a “win / failure determination (determination)”. As shown in FIG. 8A, the special symbol success / failure determination random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random number (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 includes “reach random number” in addition to the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number. (Also referred to as “reach information”) and “variation pattern random numbers (also referred to as“ variation pattern information ”)”.

  The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not a reach is generated in a game effect (effect symbol game effect) that indicates the result using the effect symbol when the result of the special symbol success / failure determination is unacceptable. Reach refers to, for example, a state where the two left and right effect symbols 8R and 8L are stopped (temporarily stopped) at the same symbol, and the remaining one medium effect symbol 8C is changing ("7 ↓ 7" Status). Then, if the medium effect symbol 8C being changed stops at the same symbol as the effect symbols 8R and 8L being stopped, the three effect symbols will stop at the same symbol, which is a win. Note that the stop (temporary stop) of the effect symbol in this case also includes a display (swaying fluctuation) that slightly fluctuates within the effect symbol display area 7b. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0-126.

  The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern including a variation time. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. In addition, the random numbers acquired based on the passage through the gate 28 include the normal symbol success / failure determination random numbers shown in FIG. The random number for normal symbol determination is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second start port 21 (normal symbol lottery). Normal design random numbers take values in the range of 0-240.

  Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of gaming states by combining the probability variation function, the variation time shortening function, and the open extension function with respect to the special symbol and the normal symbol into the activated state or the deactivated state. . For the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), the state in which the probability variation function is activated is referred to as “high probability state”, and the state in which the probability variation function is not activated is referred to as “normal state (also referred to as“ low probability state ”). " In the high probability state, the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the special symbol success / failure determination (first special symbol success / failure determination and second special symbol success / failure determination) is higher than in the normal state. In other words, in the normal state, the success / failure determination is performed using the normal state jackpot determination table, but in the high probability state, the high probability state jackpot determination table having a large number of special symbol success / failure determination random numbers. Using this, it is determined whether or not it is correct (see FIG. 9A). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the special symbol variation display result is a big hit (the stop symbol becomes a big hit symbol) is higher than when the special symbol probability variation function is not activated.

  In addition, a state in which the variable time reduction function is activated for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is referred to as a “time-short state”, and a state in which the function is not activated is referred to as a “non-time-short state”. In the short time state, the average value of the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of the fixed display) is shorter than the average value of the variation time of the special symbol in the non-short time state. That is, in the short-time state, the variation pattern is determined using a variation pattern table that is determined so that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more than in the non-time-short state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the short-time state, the digestion of the special figure hold is accelerated, and effective entry into the starting port (entrance that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with smooth progress of the game.

  The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) may be activated simultaneously, or only one of them may be activated. The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol are operated in synchronization with the special symbol variation time shortening function. That is, the probability changing function and the changing time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the short time state of the special symbol, and do not operate in the non-short time state. Therefore, in the time reduction state, the hit probability in the normal symbol success / failure determination is higher than that in the non-time reduction state. That is, the normal symbol hit / no-go determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed using a normal symbol per-decision table that has a normal symbol random number (per-random number) determined to be a winning value larger than the normal symbol per-decision table used in a non-time-saving state. (See FIG. 8D). That is, when the probability variation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the ordinary symbol is a hit (the stop symbol becomes a normal symbol) is higher than when the normal symbol display 42 is not activated. .

  In the short time state, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-short time state. In the first embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-short-time state, but is 1 second in the short-time state (see FIG. 8E). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the second start port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than that in the non-time-saving state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is activated. In addition, in the short time state, the number of times the second start port 21 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-short time state. That is, the function of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened is activated. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol success / failure determination becomes a hit in the non-time-short state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs an opening operation once for 0.2 seconds, and the second start port is in the open state during that period. Become. Also, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination becomes a hit in the short time state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 2.0 seconds three times.

  In the situation where the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extension function and the opening number increase function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, compared to the case where these functions are not activated. Thus, the second start port 21 is frequently opened, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second start port 21 is increased (also referred to as “high frequency state”). As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls (rate of giving prize balls), becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these functions are activated is referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which these functions are not activated is referred to as a “low base state”. In the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without greatly reducing the hand-held game balls. In this embodiment, the base value calculated in the low base state is displayed on the information display unit 88. That is, the number of outs (the number of shot balls) and the number of prize balls in the high base state and the big hit gaming state are not reflected in the base value displayed on the information display unit 88.

  In the high base state (high frequency state), not all the functions described above may be activated. That is, when the function is not activated by the activation of at least one of the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function for the normal symbol, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the variable winning device 22 However, it is only necessary that the second start port is easily opened (the frequency of entering the ball is high). Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without accompanying the time-short state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state can also be referred to as a “high base generation function”.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the game state after the special game in the case of the 15R first big hit is that the specific area 39 is passed during the special game. The high probability state of the special symbol, the short time state of the special symbol, and the high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate base state”. The high-accuracy base state is terminated by executing a special symbol variation display a predetermined number of times or when a big hit game is executed.

  In addition, the game state after the special game in the case of 15R second big hit is extremely difficult to pass through the specific area 39 during the special game, so the normal state of the special symbol and the short state of the special symbol, And it will be in a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low-accuracy base state (also referred to as a“ short time mode ”). The low-accuracy base state ends when a special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or when a big hit is won and the big hit game is executed. The possibility is extremely low, but if the vehicle passes through the specific area 39, the “highly accurate and high base state” is set. Further, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the game state after the special game when the 2R third big hit is achieved is that if the special region 39 is passed during the special game, the special symbol is high. Probability state, special symbol non-time-short state, and low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “highly accurate low base state”. The high probability low base state is terminated when a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuation displays are executed or when a big hit game is executed.

  This highly accurate low base state is a state where it is latent that it is a high probability state, that is, a state where it is difficult for the player to recognize that it is a high probability state. That is, the high accuracy low base state is a so-called “latent probability variation state”. In addition, a state in which it is not notified whether the jackpot probability of the current special symbol success / failure determination is low probability or high probability (low probability state or high probability state) is referred to as a “probability non-notification state”. On the other hand, it is clear to the player that the high-accuracy and high-base state is a high-probability state. That is, the high-accuracy and high-base state is a so-called “probability game state (also referred to as“ probability change mode ”)”. In the high base state, the game state after the special game in the case of 2R third big hit is the high probability state of the special symbol and the special symbol if the special region 39 is passed during the special game. It becomes a short time state and a high base state. That is, the special symbol time-saving function and the base state are the same as the state before the special game is executed. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal state of the special symbol, the non-time-short state of the special symbol, and the low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “low probability low base state”.

  Further, in a high base state such as a high-accuracy high-base state or a low-accuracy high-base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the right-handed game ball enter the right game area 3B. Further, in the high base state, the second start port 21 is easily opened compared to the low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start port 21 than to enter the first start port 20. Because it is. For this reason, a right-hand strike is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21 while allowing the game ball to pass through the gate 28 which is a trigger for determining whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate. As a result, it is possible to obtain a larger number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not to win special symbols) rather than left-handed. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is controlled to be lit in a predetermined manner, and notifies that it should be fired to the right game area.

  On the other hand, in the low base state such as the high probability low base state or the low probability low base state, it is possible to advance the game more advantageously by making the left-handed game ball enter the left game area 3A. Further, in the low base state, the second start port 21 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is easier to enter the first start port 20 than to enter the second start port 21. Because it is. Therefore, a left turn is made to enter the game ball into the first start port 20. This makes it possible to obtain a large number of starting balls (opportunities for determining whether or not a special symbol is present) rather than making a right strike. In this state, the firing direction indicator 47 is turned on (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that it should be fired to the left game area. Specifically, the firing direction indicator 47 includes two “yz” LEDs, and indicates the firing direction by lighting the LEDs according to the gaming state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that it should be fired to the left game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as “y □ z □” (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. Further, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that it should be fired to the right game area as a display mode in which both LEDs are lit such as “y ■ z ■” (for example, □: extinguished, ■: lit). it can.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 (control processing by the main control unit) will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads and executes the main control main process program shown in FIG. 12 from the ROM of the main control board 80. . As shown in the figure, in the main control main process, first, an initial setting process described later is performed (S101). In the initial setting process (S101), for example, in addition to processing such as game state restoration processing and game state initialization processing, stack setting, constant setting, interrupt time setting, CPU setting of the main control board 80, SIO , PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, various flags, status, and counter reset. The initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, the initial value of the status is “1”, and the initial value of the counter is “0”. The initial setting process (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after the game is started). In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is “normal”, the special symbol is “special”, the first special symbol is “special diagram 1”, the “first special symbol”, and the second special symbol is “special symbol 2”. "Two second figure".

  Further, after the initial setting process (S101), a mode setting process (S106) described later is executed. In this mode setting process, it is determined whether or not a predetermined change condition (change timing, change operation) described later is satisfied. If the change condition is satisfied, the setting change to the game mode selected by the mode setting switch 82 is performed. It is a process that makes it possible. Further, in this mode setting process, it is determined whether or not predetermined confirmation conditions (confirmation timing and confirmation operation) to be described later are satisfied, and if the confirmation conditions are satisfied, the set game mode is displayed on the information display section 88. The mode confirmation process to confirm by displaying on is performed. Similar to the initial setting process (S101), this mode setting process (S106) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after the game is started).

Further, after the mode setting process (S106), a power-on notification process (S107) described later is executed. This power-on notification process is a process of notifying in a different manner depending on whether the backed-up gaming state information has been initialized and the game mode setting has been changed as the power is turned on. This power-on notification process (S107) is executed only once with the power-on after the power-on, similarly to the initial setting process (S101) and the mode setting process (S106), and thereafter (after the game starts) Will not be executed.

  Further, after the power-on notification process (S107), it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is ON (S108), and the initialization flag is ON, that is, in the RAM in the initial setting process (S101) described later. If it is determined that the stored game information has been initialized (erased) (YES in S108) (YES in S108), the initialization flag is turned off (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. On the other hand, if it is determined in S108 that the initialization flag is not ON, that is, the RAM clear process has not been performed (NO in S108), the initialization flag is already OFF, and the process directly proceeds to S110. In S110, the interrupt is permitted (S110), and the process proceeds to S102. As a result, the interruption process (S105) can be executed, and when the gaming machine is in the game mode change state or the game mode confirmation state, the state is terminated and the game state is shifted to. Thereby, the display content of the information display unit 88 to be described later is switched from information indicating the game mode to information indicating the base value. In S102, interruption is prohibited (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the value of the various random number counters shown in FIG. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, the interruption is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. This interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 ms. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed and before the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt process (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Initial setting processing]
Next, the initial setting process (S101) will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the initial setting process (S101), interrupts are first prohibited (S3001), and a stack pointer setting process for setting a stack area for securing the stack area is performed (S3002). Next, interrupt setting processing for setting the interrupt mode (S3003), built-in device setting processing for setting various built-in devices such as CTC (counter / timer circuit) and PIO (peripheral device interface) (S3004), S3006 Move on to processing.

  In S3006, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not a pressing operation is performed (S3006). If it is determined in S3006 that the RAM clear switch is OFF, that is, the power is turned on without the RAM clear switch being operated (NO in S3006), then whether the power-off flag is normally turned on Is determined (S3007). If it is determined in S3007 that the power-off flag is ON (YES in S3007), RAM check data is calculated for the backup areas (161, 162) in the RAM (S3008). The RAM check data is calculated by adding all the bits after adding the state of the input port, the value of the power-off flag, and the contents of the RAM area protected at the time of power-off for each byte.

  Next, the check data calculated in S3008 is compared with the saved check data stored in the RAM when the power is turned off (also referred to as “power failure”) to determine whether the check data is normal (S3009). . If it is determined in S3009 that the calculated check data in the RAM matches the stored check data (YES in S3009), it is determined that the backup data stored in the RAM backup area (161, 162) is normal when the power is turned off. Then, initialize (clear to 0) the area other than the RAM area (backup area, etc.) that is used when performing power recovery processing, and play the game state (probability state, short time state, number of holds, game) Mode, special symbol status, normal symbol status, etc.) are restored (recovered) (S3010). Next, the power interruption flag is turned OFF (S3011), and a “power-on command at the time of power interruption recovery (power interruption recovery command)” is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 (S3012), and the process ends. The “power failure recovery command” includes a set value according to the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state, whether or not time is short, status information, etc.), and the sub control board is based on this set value. The control state 90 is also restored to the control state at the time of power failure occurrence (before power failure occurrence).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3006 that the RAM clear switch is ON, that is, the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch is operated (the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear) (YES in S3006), Alternatively, when it is determined in S3007 that the power-off flag is not normally ON (that is, OFF or abnormal) (NO in S3007), or when it is determined that the check data in the RAM does not match (S3009) In NO), the entire area (including the backup area) of the RAM (RAM of the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit) is initialized (S3013), which is different from the aforementioned “power-on command at power failure recovery”. So that the RAM can be identified, a “power-on command when clearing the RAM (RAM clear command)” is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 (S3014), the initialization flag is turned ON (S3015), and the process is performed. Finish.

  By performing this processing, when the power supply switch is turned off, the power supply switch is turned on while the RAM clear switch is operated (while the power is turned on), and the RAM clear switch is turned on until a predetermined time. Is transmitted to the main control board 80, and the entire RAM area including the backup area is initialized. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without performing such an operation, the gaming state (control state) at the time of power interruption is restored based on the gaming state information (including the gaming mode) stored in the backup area. Will be. This makes it possible to restore the gaming state (control state) during the game when power supply is resumed even in the event of an unexpected power outage, preventing the player from suffering unexpected damage. It becomes possible to do.

[Mode setting processing]
Next, the mode setting process (S106) will be described with reference to FIG. In the mode setting process, the game mode before the power is turned off is changed to another game mode selected from the above-described five game modes 1 to 5 (game mode change state). This is a process of confirming the set game mode (game mode confirmation state). In this mode setting process, a specific change condition is set, and unless the change condition is satisfied, the setting of the game mode cannot be changed even if the mode setting switch 82 is operated. Similarly, a specific confirmation condition is set, and the game mode setting cannot be confirmed unless the confirmation condition is satisfied.

  Specifically, in the mode setting process (S106), first, the initialization maintenance flag, the setting change flag, and the recovery flag are turned OFF (S3120), and the process proceeds to S3101. With this processing, the initialization maintaining flag, the setting change flag, and the recovery flag are turned off if they are ON, and are kept OFF if they are already OFF, and all of them are turned OFF. Then, only one of the flags is turned ON depending on the power-on mode by a process described later. In S3101, it is determined whether or not the initialization flag is ON, that is, whether or not the RAM is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on (S3101). If it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is ON (YES in S3101), it is then determined whether or not the mode setting key (mode setting lock) is ON (S3102). That is, the setting key described above is inserted into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock part 89, and it is determined whether the setting key is operated from the OFF position to the ON position. If the mode setting key is not ON, that is, if the setting key is not operated (not inserted) and it is determined that the mode setting lock unit 89 is in the OFF state (NO in S3102), the backed-up gaming state An initialization maintaining flag (also referred to as “first activation flag”) indicating that the information is erased (initialized) and the setting of the game mode is not changed (setting is maintained) is turned ON (S3111), Finish the process.

  As described above, even when the backup area is initialized when the gaming machine is turned on, if the mode setting lock 89 is not in the ON state when the power is turned on, the gaming mode is simply initialized. Cannot be changed. Next, when it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting key is ON, that is, the setting key is inserted into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock part 89 and the setting key is operated from the OFF position to the ON position. (YES in S3102), the process proceeds to S3103. This is because the setting key is inserted into the insertion portion 89a of the mode setting lock unit 89 in the power-off state, and the power switch 84 is operated while pressing the RAM clear switch 83 while the setting key is operated to the ON position. It shows a state of being turned on. That is, when the power is turned on, both the RAM clear switch 83 and the mode setting lock unit 89 are turned on. In the present embodiment, this is a game mode change condition. As a result, the gaming machine enters a “game mode change state” in which the setting of the game mode can be changed to an arbitrary setting.

  In S3103, it is determined whether or not the mode change flag indicating “game mode change state” is ON (S3103). If it is determined that the mode change flag is not ON (NO in S3103), the mode change flag is set. By turning it on, the “game mode change state” is set (S3104), and the process proceeds to S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in S3103 that the mode change flag is already ON (YES in S3103), the process proceeds to S3105. In S3105, the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 that allows the player to arbitrarily operate and select any game mode is read (S3105), and the game mode corresponding to the read selection information is set (S3106), The game mode set in S3106 is displayed on the information display section 88 (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3108. The display mode of the information display unit 88 when displaying the game mode is that the first information display unit 88a, the second information display unit 88b, and the third information display unit 88c are all in the center of 7 segments. Only the segment is turned on and the remaining segments and the dot display section are turned off. And the display which shows game mode is performed using the 4th information display part 88d of the right end. The display mode is any one of [1], [2], [3], [4], and [5]. In the “gaming mode change state”, the operation unit 82a of the mode setting switch 82 is slid. Each time, information ([1], [2], [3], [4] or [5]) indicating the corresponding game mode is displayed. Further, the dot display portion is turned off. For example, when game mode 3 is selected, the information display unit displays [--- 3].

  In S3108, whether or not the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key inserted into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock part 89 is rotated from the ON position to the OFF position, and the mode setting lock part 89 is in the OFF state. It is determined whether it has been done (S3108). That is, in the “gaming mode change state”, it is determined whether or not the setting change operation to an arbitrary game mode has been completed and an operation to return the setting key to the OFF position (an operation to end the “game mode change state”) has been performed. If it is determined in S3108 that the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key is still in the OFF position (NO in S3108), the process returns to S3103 and the processes up to S3108 are performed again. As a result, the game clerk or the like maintains the “game mode change state” until the setting key is operated to the OFF position (by leaving it in the ON position), and reliably sets the game mode to an arbitrary (intended) game mode. (Change the setting).

  Then, when the setting to an arbitrary (intended) game mode is completed, the setting key is operated (returned) to the OFF position, and the “game mode change state” is finished. Once the “game mode change state” is finished, the game machine is set to the “game mode change state” unless the power is turned off again and the power is turned on again in a mode that satisfies a specific change condition. It is not possible. In addition, the setting key is operated (returned) to the OFF position to finish the “game mode change state”. Instead, the setting key is operated (returned) to the OFF position. It is good also as a thing which finishes "game mode change state" by pulling out from the insertion part 89a. Even when the “game mode change state” is set, the “game mode change state” may be ended without changing the game mode.

  If it is determined in S3108 that the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the setting key has been operated to the OFF position (YES in S3108), the mode change flag is turned OFF and the “game mode change state” is ended (S3109). The backed-up gaming state information is erased (initialized), and a setting change flag (also referred to as “second activation flag”) indicating that the setting of the gaming mode has been changed is turned on (S3110), and the processing is ended. . In this embodiment, even if the game mode is not changed in the “game mode change state”, the setting change flag is set to ON. It is also possible to store the game mode that has been set (not to be deleted) and turn on the initialization maintenance flag when the game mode is not changed in the “game mode change state”.

  In S3101, if it is determined that the initialization flag is not ON, that is, the backed-up gaming state information has not been erased (initialized) (NO in S3101), it is assumed that the specific change condition is not satisfied, and “game mode change” The process proceeds to S3112 without setting the state. In S3112, the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read (S3112), and the read selection information of the mode selection switch and the game (currently being set) stored in the RAM by the recovery process of the initial setting process described above. It is determined whether or not the mode matches (S3114). Next, when it is determined in S3114 that the results of the comparison determination in S3113 match (YES in S3114), the process proceeds to S3116. In S3116, it is determined whether or not an error is being notified (S3116). If it is determined that an error is not being notified (NO in S3116), the backed up game state information is restored (not initialized) (and the game mode is set) Is turned on (S3118), a mode confirmation process described later is performed (S3119), and the process ends.

  That is, when power is turned on, the game state (control state) at the time of power interruption is restored based on the game state information stored in the backup area without performing a predetermined operation on the RAM clear switch. When the setting state of the mode setting switch is not changed, the processing order is as described above, and the game can be started without changing the game mode (without going through the “game mode change state”).

  If it is determined in S3114 that the comparison determination results in S3113 do not match (NO in S3114), error notification is performed (S3115) and the process proceeds to S3114 again. Then, until it is determined in S3114 that they match, the processing in S3114 and S3115 is repeated and error notification is continued. In S3114, the error notification is continued until it is determined to match, and the game is not shifted to a state where the game can be started. That is, the game is stopped. In this way, when it is determined that they do not match in S3114, the gaming state (control state) at the time of power interruption is restored based on the gaming state information stored and retained in the backup area (the gaming state restoration process in the initial setting process) May occur when the setting state of the mode setting switch is changed (when the mode setting switch 82 is operated even though it is not the “game mode changing state”). In the error notification, an error display indicating that “the mode setting switch has been illegally operated” is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, or a predetermined error is indicated by the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, or the speaker 67. It is possible to make a notification. Further, in the error notification, both the correct game mode setting and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch may be indicated by some display. Thereby, the setting position of the game mode by the mode setting switch 82 can be quickly corrected, and the error notification can be ended.

  On the other hand, during execution of the error notification, the setting state of the mode setting switch 82 is returned to the position corresponding to the gaming mode (the gaming mode setting being backed up) set in the gaming machine (that is, the state at the time of power interruption). As a result, it is determined in S3114 that they match (YES in S3114), and the process can proceed to S3116. In S3116, it is determined whether error notification is being performed (S3116). If it is determined that error notification is being performed (YES in S3116), error notification is terminated (S3117), and the process proceeds to S3118. As a result, a state in which a game can be started (“game ready state”) is set. As another method for terminating (releasing) this error notification, there is a method in which the power switch is turned off once, a predetermined input operation is performed on the RAM clear switch, and the power switch is turned on. At this time, the error notification is ended by the initialization of the error information regardless of whether the setting key is operated. When the power switch is turned off, the setting key is moved to the ON position, the RAM clear switch is operated, and the power switch is turned on, the error notification is terminated and the game mode is set to the mode setting. It is possible to change to the game mode corresponding to the selection information of the switch 82. Also by such a method, it is possible to end the error notification (error processing).

  In a pachinko gaming machine having a game mode setting change function as in this embodiment, when a gaming machine frame is opened for maintenance or the like, a game store clerk or a maintenance contractor inadvertently (incorrectly) mode setting switch 82 There is a possibility that the mode setting switch may be operated unintentionally. In such a case, it is possible to return to the original setting position if it is noticed that it has been operated by mistake, but it may not be noticed that it has been operated by mistake. Also, there is a possibility that someone will open the gaming machine frame illegally and operate the mode setting switch 82. Thereby, the game mode (selection information) indicated (selected) by the mode setting switch may be changed. In such a case, the game mode can be changed without restriction (even after the game starts), or the game mode can be changed by reading the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 without any special restriction when the power is turned on. Then, the game mode may be changed to a game mode that is not intended by the game store, or a game mode that is advantageous to an unauthorized player may be changed, and the game store may suffer an unexpected disadvantage. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a specific change condition is set, and unless the change condition is satisfied, the mode setting switch 82 is operated so that the operation unit 82a is set to a position where an arbitrary game mode can be set. Even if it is moved, the game mode corresponding to the position (selection information) is not changed.

  This makes it difficult to illegally change the game mode, and even if the mode setting switch 82 is operated by mistake, it is possible to prevent the game mode setting from being easily changed. In addition, the game mode setting can be changed only when the gaming machine is initialized with the power turned on, and the setting key is operated at a specific time to turn the mode setting lock on. As a result, it is possible to reduce the room for fraud. Specifically, assuming that the game mode can be changed during the game or when the game state is restored, for example, in the low-probability state, the game mode 3 has the highest jackpot probability in the low-probability state. ”And enter the high probability state, change the setting to“ gaming mode 4 ”or“ gaming mode 5 ”to increase the probability of jackpot in the high probability state or increase the continuation rate of the high probability state Such fraud can occur. However, in this embodiment, in order to change the setting of the game mode, it is necessary to initialize (RAM clear) the gaming machine. For example, in order to change the setting in a high probability state, the probability state has a low probability. It needs to be in a state. As a result, such fraud does not occur.

  In this way, the game mode change timing is set to “when power is turned on (power supply is started)”, and the game mode can be changed only when “the game machine is initialized and the set key is operated in a predetermined manner”. This can be referred to as a “game mode change condition”. In addition, since the game mode can be changed only in the process (mode setting process) performed after the power is turned on and before the game is started, the game state is changed from the initial state (for example, a high probability state, a high base The game mode cannot be changed in the state, the short-time state, the big hit game, and the symbol variation display.

[Mode confirmation processing]
Next, a mode confirmation process (S3119) for confirming the game mode being set will be described with reference to FIG. In the mode confirmation process (S3119), first, whether or not the mode setting key is ON, that is, whether or not the backed-up gaming state information is restored without being erased (initialized) and the mode setting lock unit 89 is in the ON state. Determine (S5001). If it is determined in S5001 that the mode setting key is ON (YES in S5001), the process proceeds to S5002. That is, with the power turned off, the setting key is inserted into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock part 89 to rotate from the OFF position to the ON position, and the RAM clear switch is not turned on (the initialization operation must be performed). In this case, the power is turned on. In this case, assuming that the specific confirmation condition is satisfied, the gaming machine is set to the “game mode confirmation state”.

  In S5002, it is determined whether or not the mode confirmation flag indicating that it is a “gaming mode confirmation state” in which the set gaming mode can be confirmed (S5002), and it is determined that the mode confirmation flag is not ON (NO in S5002), the mode confirmation flag is turned ON and set to “game mode confirmation state”, and the process proceeds to S5004. If it is determined in S5002 that the mode confirmation flag is ON, that is, it is already set to the “game mode confirmation state” (YES in S5002), the process proceeds to S5004. In S5004, the currently set game mode (stored in the backup area) is read (S5004), and then the read game mode is displayed on the information display section 88 (S5005), and the mode setting key is OFF. Judgment is made (S5006).

  When the currently set game mode is displayed on the information display unit 88, the information corresponding to the game mode is displayed on the fourth information display unit 88d at the right end by the same display control as described above. To do. The display control for the other information display units (88a, 88b, 88c) is the same as described above. If it is determined in S5001 that the mode setting key is not OFF, that is, it is still in the “game mode confirmation state” (NO in S5006), the process returns to S5002 and the processes up to S5006 are performed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5006 that the mode setting key is OFF, that is, the game clerk has finished checking the game mode and has rotated the setting key to the OFF position (YES in S5006), the mode confirmation flag is turned OFF. Then, the “game mode confirmation state” is terminated (S5007), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5001 that the mode setting key is not ON (NO in S5001), the process ends without generating a “game mode confirmation state”. Further, when it is determined that the mode setting key is not ON without being initialized, a notification indicating that the “game mode confirmation state” has been set may be performed using a display unit such as an LED. Similarly, when the “game mode change state” is set, a notification indicating that the game mode change state is set may be given. Then, these notifications are terminated based on the transition to a game-ready state. Thereby, the game clerk or the like can easily grasp whether the state of the gaming machine is set to “game mode change state” or “game mode confirmation state”.

  As described above, the game mode confirmation timing is “when power is turned on (power supply is started)”, and the game mode confirmation is “when the gaming machine is not initialized and the set key is operated for a predetermined operation”. What can only be made possible is the “game mode confirmation condition”. In addition, since the game mode can be confirmed only in the process (mode setting process) performed after the power is turned on and before the game is started, the game mode should be confirmed while the game is being executed (while the game is being executed). I can't. As a result, a situation where a player (unauthorized player) confirms the gaming mode of the gaming machine in the middle of a game and illegally selects a gaming machine with a high setting (for example, gaming mode 3) advantageous to himself / herself. Can be prevented as much as possible.

[Power-on notification process]
Next, a power-on notification process (S107) for notifying which of the plurality of power-on modes described above has been used will be described with reference to FIG. In the power-on notification process (S107), first, whether or not the initialization maintenance flag is ON, that is, whether or not the flag indicating the power-on mode (startup mode) turned on in the mode setting process (S106) is the initialization maintenance flag Is determined (S5101). If it is determined in S5101 that the initialization maintaining flag is ON (YES in S5101), it is the power-on mode indicated by the initialization maintaining flag [the game state information is initialized and the game mode setting is changed. Not ”is notified in“ first notification mode (first startup notification mode) ”(S5102), and the process proceeds to S5103.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5101 that the initialization maintenance flag is not ON (NO in S5101), then whether or not the setting change flag is ON, that is, the power-on state (startup) turned ON in the mode setting process (S106) It is determined whether or not the flag indicating (mode) is a setting change flag (S5105). If it is determined in S5105 that the setting change flag is ON (YES in S5105), it is a power-on mode indicated by the setting change flag [the game state information is initialized and the game mode setting is changed] The corresponding “second notification mode (second startup notification mode)” is notified (S5106), then a setting change command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5103. The setting change command is transmitted when [the game state information is initialized and the game mode setting is changed (the setting is changed)]. In addition, the sub-control unit 90 that has received the setting change command uses the notification unit (effect design display unit, board lamp, speaker, etc.) controlled by the sub-control unit 90 to confirm that the game mode setting has been changed. Show. Note that the notification (S5102, S5106, S5107) in the power-on notification processing is executed by notification means (display unit) controlled by the main control unit 80. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5105 that the setting change flag is not ON (NO in S5105), it is determined that the flag indicating the power-on mode (startup mode) turned ON in the mode setting process (S106) is the recovery flag. The third notification mode (at the time of the third activation) corresponding to the power-on mode indicated by the recovery flag [the game state information has been restored (not initialized) and the game mode setting has not been changed) Notification mode) ”(S5107), and the process proceeds to S5103.

  Here, the “first notification mode (first startup notification mode)”, “second notification mode (second startup notification mode)”, and “third notification mode (third startup notification mode)”, respectively, It is assumed that the notification mode is different, and the person in contact with (seeing) these notification modes determines whether the power-on mode (startup mode) performed by the user is as intended (game mode change). It is possible to confirm whether or not there is initialization or not. The first notification mode, the second notification mode, and the third notification mode are display modes (display characters, display characters, display colors, emission colors, blinking speeds, lighting times, etc.) performed on LEDs, liquid crystal display units, and the like. Can be different. Moreover, the sound (sound type, volume) output from the speaker can be different. Further, these plural elements may be executed in combination, or may be executed alone. Moreover, a some element may differ from another alerting | reporting aspect, and only 1 element may differ from another alerting | reporting aspect.

  These notification modes may be executed only on the display unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine and not executed on the display unit provided on the front side of the gaming machine. Thereby, a game mode setter such as a game clerk can check the power-on mode, but it can be difficult for others, for example, a player to check the power-on mode. Moreover, you may alert | report with the some alerting | reporting part provided in the gaming machine back side and the gaming machine front side. Thereby, it becomes possible to confirm whether or not the power-on mode (start-up mode) performed by itself is as intended. Moreover, you may alert | report only by the alerting | reporting part provided in the game machine front side.

  Further, any one of “first notification mode (first startup notification mode)”, “second notification mode (second startup notification mode)” and “third notification mode (third startup notification mode)” Counting means (time keeping means) is provided that counts (clocks) the notification time after the start of notification. In S5103, it is determined whether or not the specific notification time has elapsed based on the value of the counting means (time measuring means) (S5103). If it is determined that the specific notification time has not elapsed (NO in S5103), S5103 Returning to step S5103, the determination is performed again until the specific notification time is reached. If it is determined in S5103 that the specific notification time has elapsed (YES in S5103), the notification that is being executed is terminated (S5104), and the process is terminated. In this embodiment, the specific notification time is set to about 10 seconds. In this way, since the notification mode associated with power-on varies depending on the power-on mode (whether initialization has been performed or whether the setting has been changed), the game store clerk, etc. It is possible to confirm whether or not to do.

  In addition, when initialization (RAM clear) is performed, initialization notification is performed. When initialization is not performed, initialization notification is not performed. When changing the game mode setting even when initialization is performed It is good also as what changes the mode of initialization alerting | reporting when not performing (1st initialization alerting | reporting, 2nd initialization alerting | reporting).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the interrupt process (S105), an output process (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output to the sub-control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc. To do. The command and the like output here include information regarding the gaming state, special symbol success / failure determination, symbol as a jackpot type, variation pattern, and the like. The command is composed of, for example, 2-byte information. The upper 1 byte is information regarding the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information regarding the content of the command.

  In the input process (S202) performed subsequent to the output process (S201), various sensors (a first start port sensor 20a, a second start port sensor 21a, a first big prize port sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the general winning opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5) are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as winning ball information. Also, a detection signal from a lower plate full detection sensor for detecting the fullness of the lower plate 62 is taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower plate full data.

  The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values (including normal symbol random number counter values) shown in FIG. 7 includes the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and other periods (after the end of the interrupt process (S105), The period until the next interrupt process (S105) is started).

  After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the base display process (S212) described later, the start sensor detection process (S204) described later, the normal figure operation process (S205), and the special figure operation process (S206) The specific area sensor detection process (S207), the start ball entry process (S208), the power-off monitoring process (S209), and the mode setting monitoring process (S210) are executed. Thereafter, other processing (S210) not closely related to the present invention is executed, and the interrupt processing (S105) is terminated. Then, until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, the processes of S102 to S104 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed. When the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 ms), the interrupt process is performed again. (S105) is executed. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command set in the RAM output buffer in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Base display processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a base display process for displaying a “base value” that is a ratio of the number of award balls paid out to the number of shot balls in a specific period (a period excluding a high base state and a big hit game) (S212). ). When a game ball is launched into the game area 3 and the fired game ball enters a entrance (a winning entrance) such as the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the general entrance port 27, an entry is made. A predetermined number of prize balls for each mouth are paid out to the player (a gaming profit is given). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 3, the game area 3 is provided with a large number of game nails 16 that change the flow direction of the game balls. Depending on the arrangement and angle (orientation) of the game nails 16, The entrance rate of game balls will change.

  In addition, the gaming machines installed in the game store are inspected by a predetermined third party inspection organization, and only gaming machines that pass the inspection are recognized as appropriate gaming machines and can be installed in the gaming store. Further, this inspection target includes a base value, and it is necessary to play a game with an appropriate base value. However, the higher the base value (the higher the entrance rate to the entrance), the more advantageous to the player. Therefore, depending on the game store, the angle (direction) of the game nail 16 may be adjusted to enter the entrance. There was a case where the entrance rate of was reduced. When such adjustment is performed, the installed gaming machine becomes a gaming machine having a performance different from that of the gaming machine that has passed the inspection, which is not appropriate.

  Therefore, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with the above-described out sensor 29, counts the number (total number) of game balls launched into the game area, counts the game balls paid out as prize balls, The base value of the gaming machine is calculated and displayed. The base value of the present embodiment includes a first base value and a second base value. The “first base value” is the total number of shot balls (out number) stored for calculating the first base value. ) And the total number of winning balls stored for calculating the first base value, the base value (real-time base value) of the whole period (except for the high base state and during the big hit game) is indicated (first Period-based value). In addition, the “second base value” is stored as the number of special period firing balls (the number of special period outs) stored for calculating the second base value in the predetermined special period, and for calculating the second base value. The special period base value (fixed period base value) is shown.

  More specifically, the second base value is calculated by “total number of winning balls / 5000 for the period” every time the total number of game balls to be fired reaches 5000. The second base value is updated every time the total number of fired balls is counted 5000. Therefore, in the gaming machine that starts the game for the first time, the second base value is not displayed until the total number of shot balls reaches 5000. Specifically, until the first second base value is calculated, only the center of the 7-segment display part of the third information display part 88c and the fourth information display part 88d is displayed blinking as “b2. “-” Is displayed. Further, the calculated first base value and second base value are displayed on the information display unit 88. The information display unit 88 is in a state in which the gaming machine is turned on and becomes a “game-ready state”. The constant base value (first base value or second base value) is displayed. The main control board 80 includes a display changeover switch (not shown) for switching the display content of the base value of the information display unit 88 to the first base value or the second base value. And in this base display state (game possible state), the display content displayed on the information display part 88 can be switched to a 1st base value or a 2nd base value by operating a display switch.

  The display mode of the base value in the information display unit 88 is a display mode in which information indicating which base value is displayed and a base value up to the second decimal place can be displayed. In order to establish a business at a game store, the base value (number of award balls / number of shot balls) is usually smaller than “1”. Specific display modes will be described below. For example, at a predetermined timing, the first base value is “0.25” and the second base value is “0.26”. When displaying the first base value, the 7-segment display part of the first information display part 88a and the second information display part 88b is used to perform lighting display so as to be “b1”, and the second information display part 88b Turn on the dot display to indicate the decimal point. And the numerical value below a decimal point is displayed using the 7 segment display part of the 3rd information display part 88c and the 4th information display part 88d. As a result, “b1.25” is displayed on the information display section 88. Since this first base value is a base value that changes in real time, it changes in real time to “b1.26” and “b1.24” as the prize ball ratio increases and the out ratio increases. The base value shall be calculated by rounding off the third decimal place. Further, the display mode of the second base value displayed by operating a predetermined changeover switch is the same as that of the first base value, and specifically, “b2.26” is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, every time the number of shot balls of 5000 is counted, a new second base value is calculated, and the base value displayed as the second base value is updated. That is, when the total number of shot balls is 0 to 4999, “second base value: no display” is set, and when the total number of shot balls is 5000 to 9999, “second base value: base value for the period of 1 to 5000 is set. “Display”, until the total number of shot balls is 10,000 to 14999, “second base value: updated display to base value in period of 5001 to 10000”,...

  In this embodiment, only the most recently calculated second base value is displayed. However, in addition to such a mode, a third base value, a fourth base value, a fifth base value,... Are provided. These base values may be displayed by operating a predetermined changeover switch. The second base value is stored as a past second base value for each update, the previous second base value is the third base value, and the previous second base value is the fourth base value. The second base value three before may be displayed as the fifth base value in order. As a result, the past second base value can also be a target of confirmation (inspection).

  The first base value is calculated in real time every time the out sensor 29 detects a shot ball (out ball), and every time a prize ball is paid out. The display is updated each time. As another aspect, since the first base value has a large error (the numerical value is not stable) due to accidental continuous entry immediately after the start of the game, the total number of shot balls (total number of outs) is the specific number of balls. Until the value reaches (for example, 200), the calculated value (first base value) may not be shown (not displayed). For example, it is good also as an aspect which blinks and displays only the center of 7 segment display part of the 3rd information display part 88c and the 4th information display part 88d until it reaches a specific number of balls. Specifically, “b1. “-” Is displayed. Then, the first base value calculated when the total number of shot balls reaches 200 may be displayed (for example, “b1.35”).

  Also, base values such as the first base value, the second base value (including the third base value, the fourth base value, etc.), and the data for calculating the base value (the number of shot balls, the number of prize balls) The count value and the like are to be backed up when the power interruption occurs and are stored in a specific backup area. Further, the base related information stored in the specific backup area is not subject to initialization using a RAM clear switch or the like because it is used for inspection and confirmation. Therefore, the base related information is information that is not deleted even if the gaming machine is initialized.

  As another aspect, it is impossible to initialize the base related information without opening (opening) the main control board storage case for storing the main control board 80. It may be possible to perform initialization by operating a switch or the like provided inside after opening. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the base value or the like, it is possible to initialize (reset) with the opening of the main control board storage case after undergoing inspection. In addition, because the main control board storage case requires the destruction of some parts as it is opened (because it is configured so that it can be opened), if the base related information is erased illegally, The act can be recognized. This makes it possible to prevent fraud.

  In addition, information indicating these base values (first base value, second base value, etc.) may be externally output from a predetermined external terminal to a hall computer or the like connected to the external terminal. Thereby, it is possible to easily grasp the abnormality of the base value on the hall computer side. In addition, a plurality of base values (first base value, second base value, etc.) received on the hall computer side are managed, and abnormality occurs in a plurality (all) of base values by the base abnormality determination means provided in the hall computer. If it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, the occurrence of the abnormality can be notified. As an abnormality notification mode, the display unit (liquid crystal, LED, lamp, etc.) to which the hall computer is connected is displayed in a mode indicating a base error, or a base error is displayed on a gaming machine external lamp provided for each gaming machine. It can be displayed in a manner, displayed in a manner indicating that some error has occurred, or an error sound can be output from a speaker. Of course, when such a base error occurs, not only the display unit connected to the hall computer but also an error display or an error sound may be output from a display unit or a speaker included in the gaming machine. As a result, when a base error occurs, the amusement shop can quickly notice the occurrence of the error and prevent the occurrence of unexpected disadvantage as much as possible.

  In the base display process (S212), it is first determined whether or not the time is short (S5201). If it is determined that the time is not short (NO in S5201), then it is determined whether or not the big hit game is being played (S5202). If it is determined in S5202 that there is no big hit (S5202), the process proceeds to S5203. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time is short in S5201 (YES in S5201), and if it is determined that a big hit game is in S5202 (YES in S5202), the calculation of the first base value and the second base value ( The process proceeds to S5209 without performing (update). This is because the first base value and the second base value are the number of out balls (number of shot balls) and prize balls generated when the game state is in a low base state (specific period) excluding during short-time and big hit games. Calculated for numbers. That is, the first base value and the second base value are values indicating the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of out balls (number of fired balls) in the normal gaming state (low base state). The number of balls (number of shot balls) and the number of prize balls are not data for calculating the first base value and the second base value.

  In S5203, it is determined whether or not an out ball is detected, that is, whether or not a game ball is detected by the out sensor 29 (S5203). If it is determined that a game ball is detected by the out sensor 29 (YES in S5203), The detected value is added to calculate (update) the first base value and the second base value (including a value for updating to a new second base value) (S5204). Store (S5205) and proceed to S5206. On the other hand, in S5203, when it is determined that the game ball is not detected by the out sensor 29 (NO in S5203), the process proceeds to S5206 without updating the number of out balls. S5203 to S5205 are processes for updating the number of out balls when calculating the first base value and the second base value.

  S5206 determines whether or not a prize ball has been paid out (S5206). If it is determined that a prize ball has been paid out (YES in S5206), the number of prize balls that have been paid out is added to the first number. The base value and the second base value (including a value for updating to a new second base value) are calculated (updated) (S5207), the calculated value is stored (S5208), and the process proceeds to S5209. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined in S5206 that no prize ball has been paid out (NO in S5206), the process proceeds to S5209 without updating the number of prize balls. S5206 to S5208 are processes for updating the number of prize balls when calculating the first base value and the second base value.

  In S5209, the setting of the information display unit 88, that is, which base value (first base value or second base value) the information display unit 88 is set to display by the changeover switch is read (S5209), The updated base value corresponding to the setting is displayed on the information display unit 88 (S5210), and the process is terminated. Thereby, the base value displayed at the timing according to each base value is updated, and when the base value is updated, the updated base value can be displayed on the information display unit 88. .

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). . If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), the number of normal symbol holding balls (the number of ordinary figure holding balls, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of holding the usual figure holding in the RAM) is It is determined whether or not it is 4 or more (S302), and if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

  If the number of normal symbol holding balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), “1” is added to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value of the random symbol counter for normal symbol determination (label-TRND-H) stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired, and the acquired random number value is obtained. (Acquired information) is stored in an address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol reserved balls in the general symbol reserved storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

  In S305, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 21, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second start port sensor 21a (S305). If a game ball has not entered the second start port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. If a game ball has entered the second start port 21 (YES in S305), a special figure is displayed. 2 The number of reserved balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically, the value of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) has reached four (upper limit number). It is determined whether or not there is (S306). If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is less than four (NO in S306), Special figure 2 1 is added to the number of reserved balls (S307).

  Subsequently, special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S308) is performed. In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the random symbol counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM (label -TRND-A), the random number for determining the jackpot type The value of the counter (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (that is, the random number shown in FIG. 8A). And the obtained random number values (acquired information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved special figure 2 balls in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b.

  Subsequently, in the start port sensor detection process (S204), it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first start port 20, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 20a (S309). ). If no game ball has entered the first start port 20 (NO in S309), the process is completed. If a game ball has entered the first start port 20 (YES in S309), a special figure is displayed. The number of 1 reserved balls (the number of the first special figure hold, specifically the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the first special figure hold provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) reaches 4 (upper limit number) It is determined whether or not (S310). If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached 4 (YES in S310), the process is terminated. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than 4 (NO in S310), Special figure 1 "1" is added to the number of reserved balls (S311).

  Subsequently, special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S312) is performed. In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (That is, the random number values shown in FIG. 8A are acquired), and the obtained random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current special figure 1 reserved ball number in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a. .

[Usuzu movement process]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a general operation process (S205) shown in FIG. 20 following the start port sensor detection process (S204). In the normal drawing operation process (S205), the processing related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and “normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these stages. . When the “normal operation status” is “1” (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “2” (S401). NO at S403, YES at S403), normal symbol variation processing (S404) is performed, and when the “normal figure movement status” is “3” (both NO at S401 and S403, YES at S405), the normal symbol is fixed The process (S406) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4” (NO in all of S401, S403, and S405), the ordinary electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is “1” by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 21, in the normal symbol standby process (S402), it is first determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (S501), and if it is “0” (YES in S501). This process is finished. On the other hand, if it is not “0” (NO in S501), a later-described normal symbol success / failure determination process is performed (S502). Further, after the normal symbol success / failure determination processing (S502), normal symbol variation pattern selection processing is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, with reference to the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (E), if the gaming state is in the short-time state, the normal symbol variation pattern having a variation time of 1 second is selected. To do. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a non-time-short state, the normal symbol variation pattern with the normal symbol variation time of 30 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, a normal symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed. Further, after the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), the normal symbol variation start process is performed (S505), and the process is terminated. In the normal symbol variation start process, the normal symbol variation display is started with the normal symbol variation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to “2”. In the normal symbol variation start process, a normal symbol variation start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol success / failure determination processing]
As shown in FIG. 22, in the normal symbol success / failure determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol appropriateness determination random number counter stored in the general symbol hold storage unit is read (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (that is, whether or not the gaming state is a time reduction state) (S602). If it is determined in S602 that the time reduction flag is ON, that is, it is in the time reduction state (YES in S602), the table for the time reduction state (the hit determination value is the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 8D). Based on “0” to “239”), it is determined whether or not it is a hit based on the high-probability normal-winning determination (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the read random number counter for normal symbol appropriateness determination (label-TRND-H) matches any of the hit determination values. On the other hand, if it is determined in S602 that the time reduction flag is not ON, that is, it is in the non-time reduction state (NO in S602), the table for the non-time reduction state in the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a hit based on a low-probability normal-winning determination determination based on the hit determination values “0” and “1”) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605.
Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal map win / fail determination (S603, S604) is a hit (per normal map) (S605), and if it is determined to be out (NO in S605), the display is stopped. A normal symbol (unusual symbol) is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal map) in S605 (YES in S605), a hit normal symbol (design per universal symbol) to be stopped is determined (S607), and the per-general symbol flag is turned ON (S608). ) Finish the process.

[Normal design random number shift processing]
Following the normal symbol variation pattern selection processing (S503), normal symbol random number shift processing (S504) is executed. As shown in FIG. 23, in the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the normal symbol holding ball number is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each general map hold in the general map storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest-order reserved memory in the ordinary-pending storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth ordinary-holding storage is cleared to 0 (S703). ) Finish the process. In this way, ordinary map suspension is digested in order of suspension.

[Normal symbol change processing]
As shown in FIG. 24, in the normal symbol changing process (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol change time has passed (S801), and if it has not passed (NO in S801), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it has elapsed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802) and the normal symbol operation status is set to “3” (S803). Then, after performing other processing such as stopping the fluctuation display of the normal symbol at a display result (a normal symbol or a normal symbol outside the normal symbol) according to the determination result of the random number for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct (S804), Finish.

[Normal symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 25, in the normal symbol determination process (S406), it is first determined whether or not the universal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). If the ordinary figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the normal hit flag is ON (YES in S901), it is subsequently determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON, that is, whether or not the time reduction state is in effect (S902). If it is in the time-short state (YES in S902), the opening pattern in the time-short state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S903). As described above, the release pattern in the short-time state is an release pattern in which the release for 2.0 seconds is repeated three times. Therefore, “3” is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

  On the other hand, if it is in the non-short-time state (NO in S902), the open pattern in the non-time-short state is set as the open pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) (S906). The open pattern in the non-short-time state is an open pattern in which a 0.2 second release is performed once as described above. Accordingly, “1” is set in the second start port opening counter. Then, following the setting of the release pattern (S903, S906), the normal operation status is set to “4” (S904), and this processing is completed.

[Normal electric equipment processing]
As shown in FIG. 26, in the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end-of-usual flag is ON (S1001). The normal hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has ended in the auxiliary game executed as a win. If the normal hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second start port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not open (NO in S1002), it is determined whether or not the timing (timing) for opening the second start port 21 has been reached (S1003). If this is the case, the second starting port 21 is opened (S1004), and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is determined in advance whether the timing (timing) for closing the second start port 21 has been reached (that is, after the second start port 21 is opened). (S1005). If not reached (NO in S1005), the process is finished. If it has reached (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (closed). (S1006).

  Then, following the closing process of the second starting port 21 (S1006), the value of the second starting port opening counter is decremented by 1 (S1007), and it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting port opening counter is “0”. (S1008). If it is not “0” (NO in S1008), the process is finished as it is to open the second start port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is “0” (YES in S1008), the base game end process for ending the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the base map end flag is set (S1010) to end the process. The second start port opening counter is set to “0” when the second start port 21 is opened (opening operation of the movable member 23) three times if it is in the time-short state, and if it is in the non-time-short state. When the second start port 21 is opened once, it becomes “0”.

  On the other hand, if the normal per-completion flag is ON in S1001 (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second start port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. The end flag is turned off (S1011), the ordinary figure flag is turned off (S1012), the ordinary figure operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and the process is terminated. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal operation process (FIG. 20).

[Special figure operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure operation process (S206) following the ordinary figure operation process (S205). In the special figure operation process (S206), as shown in FIG. 27, the process related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each stage. If the “special operation status” is “1” (YES in S1101), a special symbol standby process (S1102) is performed. If the “special operation status” is “2” (S1101) NO in S1103, YES in S1103), special symbol change processing (S1104) is performed, and if the “special symbol movement status” is “3” (both NO in S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105), the special symbol is confirmed When the process (S1106) is performed and the “special drawing operation status” is “4” (NO in S1101, S1103, S1105, YES in S1107), the special electric accessory process 1 as a big hit game (S1108) When the “special drawing operation status” is “5” (S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are all NO), the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) as a small hit game is performed. The special figure operation status is “1” by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 28, in the special symbol stand-by process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (that is, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls) at the second start port 21 is “0” (S1201). . Special Figure 2 If the number of held balls is “0” (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the second starting port 21, the first start It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the mouth 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1) is “0” (S1206). If the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is also “0” (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no random number counter value acquired due to the ball entering the first starting port 20, the image It is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is being processed as a standby screen (during execution of a demo screen for waiting for customers) (S1211). If so (YES in S1211), the processing is terminated. Otherwise (NO in S1211), standby screen setting processing is executed to display the standby screen (S1212).

  In S1201, if the special figure 2 reserved ball number is not “0” (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more random number counter values acquired due to the ball entering the second starting port 21 The special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202), the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203), the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) described later are performed in this order. Also, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” but the special figure 1 reserved ball number is not “0” (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, the random number counter value related to the second start port 21 If there is one or more random number counter values acquired due to entering the first starting port 20 but there is no memory, the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1207), which will be described later, Pattern selection processing (S1208), special figure 1 random number shift processing (S1209), and special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1210) are performed in this order. As described above, in the first embodiment, the change display of the first special symbol based on the first special figure hold is performed only when the second special figure hold is “0” (YES in S1201). That is, the digestion of the second special symbol hold (the change display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special symbol hold (the change display of the first special symbol). In the first embodiment, the success / failure determination based on the second special figure hold is more likely to be a big hit with a large profit for the player than the success / failure determination based on the first special figure hold.

[Special Figure 2 Decision Processing]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202), first, as a determination value, the lowest area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the first special figure reservation first). The value (label-TRND-A) of the special symbol success / failure random number counter stored in the corresponding RAM area is read (S1301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in a high probability state (S1302). If it is not a high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, if it is a normal state, the normal mode corresponding to the game mode (for example, game mode 2) set in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 9A). Based on the state big hit determination table (the big hit determination values are “3” and “397”), it is determined whether or not it is true (S1303). On the other hand, if the state is a high probability state (YES in S1302), the jackpot determination table for the high probability state corresponding to the game mode (for example, game mode 2) set in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 9A). Based on the above, it is determined whether or not (S1307). In the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the jackpot determination values are “3”, “53”, “113”, “173”, “227”, “281”, “337”, “397”, “449”. , “503”. Although detailed explanation is omitted, when the game mode is set to a game mode other than the game mode 2, it is based on the jackpot determination table corresponding to the set game mode shown in FIG. In this case, it is assumed that the determination is correct. The jackpot determination value at that time is also as shown in FIG.

  When the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1309) is determined as “big hit” (YES in S1304), the value of the big hit type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) is read and set as shown in FIG. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table corresponding to the game mode being present (S1310), the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1311), and the jackpot flag is turned on (S1312). ) Finish the process. In the case of determination of success / failure related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type determination table is determined using the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol, and in the case of determination of success / failure related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table. If it is determined that the first special symbol (special diagram 1) is a big hit, any one of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, and 2R third big hit is executed. Further, if it is determined that the second special symbol (special diagram 2) is determined to be a big hit, all the 15R fourth big hits are determined (FIG. 8B).

  The big hit flag includes a long hit flag that is turned on when the type of big hit is 15R first big hit or 15R second big hit, and a short hit flag that is turned on when it is 2R third big hit. Here, the round indicator 45 is composed of two LEDs, a 2R lamp and a 15R lamp. When the 2R third big hit and the short hit flag is turned ON, the 2R third big hit symbol is displayed. The 2R lamp is lit and displayed at the time when is fixedly displayed. Specifically, the display mode is “2R ▲ 15RΔ” (for example, ▲: lit, Δ: off). In addition, when the long hit flag is turned ON when any one of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, and 15R fourth big hit is turned on, the lamp for 15R lights at the timing when the corresponding big hit symbol is confirmed and displayed. Is displayed. Specifically, the display mode is “2RΔ15R ▲”.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination (S1303, S1307) is not “big hit” (NO in S1304), it corresponds to the small hit determination table corresponding to the set game mode (for example, game mode 2). It is determined whether or not a small hit is made using the small hit determination table for small hits (S1305). That is, in the case of the game mode 2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) matches any of the small hit determination values “101” to “105”. (FIG. 9). If it is determined that it is not a small hit (NO in S1305), a missing symbol is determined (S1308), and the process ends. If it is determined that the game is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the small hit flag is turned ON (S1306), and the process is terminated. In addition, you may provide the random number which determines whether it is a small hit separately from the random number for special symbol success / failure determination.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
In the special symbol standby process (FIG. 28), a special figure 2 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1203) following the special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202). As shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a short time state (whether or not the short time flag is ON) (S1401). If it is not the time-short state (NO in S1401), that is, if it is not the time-short state, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S1402). If it is ON (YES in S1402), the big hit in the non-time-short state The change pattern is selected based on the change pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) by referring to the table for use (the portion corresponding to the non-short-time state and the big hit in the change pattern table shown in FIG. 11) (S1403). . If the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. In the first embodiment, the non-time-short state medium big hit table is divided according to whether the big hit is a long hit (15R big hit) or a short hit (2R big hit). However, since this process is a variation pattern selection process for the special figure 2, the big prize winning in the lottery of the special figure 2 is only 15R fourth big hit (long hit). Accordingly, the location referred to in this process is always a location per length, and the variation pattern P1 or the variation pattern P2 is selected. The non-time-short state medium big hit table need not be divided into a long hit and a short hit. This is the same for the short-time state big hit table described later.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S1402), it is determined whether the small hit flag is ON (S1405). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S1405), the change is made with reference to the non-time-short state medium / small hit table (the portion corresponding to the non-time-short state and the small hit in the change pattern table shown in FIG. 9). A variation pattern is selected based on the pattern random number counter value (S1409). Specifically, in the first embodiment, the variation pattern P4 is always selected.

  If the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S1405), it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is a reach establishment random number value (S1406). As shown in FIG. 8C, the reach establishment random number value is “0” to “5” in the time reduction state, and “0” to “13” in the non-time reduction state. That is, the time-short state is less likely to reach when it is out of time than the non-time-short state. This is for speeding up the digestion of the special figure hold by making more selections with no reach effect with a short variation time in the short time state selected.

  When the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is a reach establishment random number value (YES in S1406), that is, in the case of reach presence / absence, the reach presence / absence table during non-short-time state (variation shown in FIG. 11) A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to a portion of the pattern table corresponding to a non-time-short state and a reach / loss of reach (S1407). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P5 or P6 is selected.

  When the reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) is not a reach-established random number value (NO in S1406), that is, when reach is not missed, the table for reaching no miss during non-time-short state (variation pattern shown in FIG. 11) A variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to the non-time-short state and the portion corresponding to no reach in the table (S1408). When the reach is out of reach, a function of shortening and changing according to the number of reserved balls is activated. That is, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is “3” or “4”, a variation pattern with a short variation time is selected compared to when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is “0” to “2”. It has come to be. In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P7 or P8 is selected.

  If it is determined in S1401 that the gaming state is the short-time state (YES in S1401), as shown in FIG. 31, the reference variation pattern table is a table for the short-time state (the variation pattern shown in FIG. 11). The processing (S1410 to S1416) is performed in the same flow as steps S1402 to S1609 except that the table is a portion corresponding to the time reduction state. That is, if it is a big hit, refer to the portion corresponding to the big hit in FIG. 11 for the short hit, refer to the portion corresponding to the short hit in FIG. Based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value with reference to the portion corresponding to the reach-shortage state in FIG. 11 and the portion corresponding to the reach-less state in FIG. To select the variation pattern.

  In the variation pattern table during the short-time state (the portion corresponding to the short-time state in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 11), the function of the shortening variation according to the number of retained balls when the reach is out of reach is the number of retained balls “2”. Work when ~ 4. That is, the shortening variation is more easily selected than in the non-time-short state. In addition, when winning a long hit out of the big hits, it is easier to select a fluctuation pattern having a shorter fluctuation time than in the non-time-short state. In other words, the variation pattern table in the short-time state is a table in which the average value of the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than the variation pattern table in the non-time-short state.

  After the variation pattern is selected as described above, the other processing (S1404) shown in FIG. 30 is performed and this processing is terminated. In other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the special figure 2 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is one level lower (for example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is composed of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003") , The address “0000” side) (S1502). Then, “0” is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation is stored (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1503), and this process ends.

  After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1204), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205) of FIG. 28 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1205), the special figure operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. In the special symbol standby process (S1102) of FIG. 28, when the special figure 2 reserved ball number is “0” and the special figure 1 reserved ball number is not “0” (YES in S1201, NO in S1206). The special figure 1 determination process (S1207), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) are performed in this order.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Fail Judgment Processing]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special figure 1 success / failure determination process (S1207), the processing (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 success / failure determination process (S1202) shown in FIG. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is related to the special figure 1, in S1601, the lowermost area of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (ie, the RAM area corresponding to the first special figure reservation) is stored. The stored special symbol success / failure random number counter value (label-TRND-A) is read. In the big hit type determination in S1608, there is a possibility that any of 15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, and 2R third big hit is determined (FIG. 10). As shown in the column of the first special symbol (special diagram 1) in FIG. 10, the distribution ratio for each jackpot is determined by the game mode. When it is determined that the big hit type is 15R first big hit or 15R second big hit, the long hit flag is turned ON as a big hit flag in step S1609. On the other hand, if it is determined that 2R third big hit, the short hit flag is turned on as a big hit flag in S1609.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208), the process (S1701 to S1720) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1403) shown in FIGS. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this processing is related to Special Figure 1, if YES in S1702 (that is, if the big hit flag is ON), the type of big hit is either 15R big hit (either 15R first big hit or 15R second big hit) It is determined whether or not (S1703). If it is 15R big hit (YES in S1703), refer to the table for 15R big hit during the non-time-short state (the portion corresponding to the non-time-short state and long hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 11). A variation pattern is selected based on the random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1704). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern P1 or the fluctuation pattern P2 is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1703 that the 15R big hit is not (NO in S1703), that is, if it is the 2R third big hit, the 2R big hit table in the non-time-short state (the non-time-short state in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value with reference to the portion corresponding to the short hit (S1706). Specifically, the variation pattern P3 is selected.

  In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection process, even when YES is determined in S1712 (that is, when the big hit flag is ON), the big hit type is 15R big hit (either 15R first big hit or 15R second big hit) It is determined whether or not (S1713). If it is 15R big hit (YES in S1713), the fluctuation pattern random number counter is referred to by referring to the table for 15R big hit during the short-time state (the portion corresponding to the short-time state and long hit in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 11). A variation pattern is selected based on the value (S1714). Specifically, any one of the variation patterns P9 to P11 is selected.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S1713 that it is not a 15R big hit (NO in S1713), that is, if it is a 2R third big hit, a 2R big hit table in the short time state (the short time state and short hit in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 11). The variation pattern is selected on the basis of the variation pattern random number counter value (S1715). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern P12 is selected.

  In this special figure 1 variation pattern selection processing, after performing variation pattern selection (S1704, S1706, S1709, S1710, S1711, S1714, S1715, S1718, S1719, S1720), other processing (S1705, FIG. 27) To finish this process. In other processing (S1705), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by output processing (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in FIG. 36, in the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of the various counter values in the first special figure storage unit 85a is shifted down by one (S2002). Then, “0” is set in the highest address space of the first special figure storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth special figure reservation is stored (when the upper limit number is stored). The area is cleared to 0 (S1803), and this process ends. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1209), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210) of FIG. 28 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1210), the special figure operation status is set to "2" and a fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the fluctuation display of the first special symbol.

[Special symbol change processing]
As shown in FIG. 37, in the special symbol variation processing (S1104), first, the variation time of the special symbol (variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in S1203 or S1208 in FIG. 28, see FIG. 11) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S1901). If it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the process ends. Thereby, the variable display of the special symbol is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S1903). If it is ON (YES in S1903), the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (S1904), and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is “0” (S1903). S1905). If it is determined in S1905 that the probability variation counter is “0”, the probability variation flag is turned OFF, and the process proceeds to S1907. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability variation flag is not ON (NO in S1903) and when it is determined that the probability variation counter is not “0” (NO in S1905), the process proceeds to S1907.

  In S1907, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S1907). If it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON (YES in S1907), the time reduction for counting the number of times the special symbol is changed during the time reduction state is counted. The counter value is decremented by 1 (S1908), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0” (S1909). If it is “0” (YES in S1909), the time reduction flag is turned OFF (S1910). The process proceeds to S1911. If it is determined that the hour / hour flag is not ON (NO in S1907), and if it is determined that the value of the hour / hour counter is not “0” (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911. In S1911, the special figure operation status is set to “3” (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the special symbol variation display at a result corresponding to the determination result of the special symbol success / failure determination random number and the jackpot type determination random number is performed (S1912), and this processing is ended.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
As shown in FIG. 38, in the special symbol confirmation process (S1106), it is first determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (S2001). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in S2001), then it is determined whether the type of big hit is 15R big hit (15R first big hit, 15R second big hit, or 15R fourth big hit) (S2002). . If it is determined in S2002 that the type of jackpot is 15R jackpot (YES in S2002), the round counter value for counting the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is set to “15” (S2003) Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the jackpot type is not 15R jackpot (NO in S2002), that is, the jackpot type in this case is 2R jackpot, set “2” to the value of the round counter ( S2004), the process proceeds to S2005.

  In S2005, a winning opening opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is set (S2005), and the process proceeds to S2006. Here, the opening pattern of the big prize opening is determined according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 6), and in this embodiment, the big winning opening that opens and closes in a specific round is fixed. Specifically, in any big win, the 1st and 2nd rounds open and close the second big prize opening 35, and the 3rd to 15th rounds open and close the first big prize opening 30 (if the big win is 3 rounds or more). To do. On the other hand, although the same big prize opening (for example, the second big prize opening 35 in the first round) is opened and closed in a specific round in different types of big hits, the opening and closing pattern (opening pattern) may be different.

  In other words, in this embodiment, a winning pattern opening pattern is defined for each type of jackpot. Specifically, if it is a 15R first big hit, the 15R first big hit release pattern is set, and the 15R first big hit release pattern is executed during the execution of the 15R first big hit game. . If the 15R second big hit is set, an open pattern for the 15R second big hit is set. If the 2R third big hit is set, the open pattern for the 2R third big hit is set. If the 15R fourth big hit is set, the 15R fourth big hit is set. Set an open pattern for big hits. Then, the corresponding jackpot opening pattern is executed in each jackpot game.

  In S2006, a jackpot opening command is set to start the jackpot game (S2006). The opening command is determined by the type of jackpot, corresponding to each jackpot, such as an opening command for 15R jackpot (15R first jackpot, 15R second jackpot and 15R fourth jackpot), 2R third jackpot opening command, etc. Each is provided. Then, the corresponding opening period is subsequently executed by the set opening command. In S2007, the opening period of the jackpot game is started (S2007), and the special figure operation status is set to “4” (S2008).

  If it is determined in S2001 that the big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is then determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON (S2009). If the small hit flag is ON (YES in S2009), a small hit release pattern is set (S2010), and the process proceeds to S2011. Here, in the small hit opening pattern, the second big prize opening 35 is opened twice for 0.9 seconds each. This is an open pattern similar to the open pattern for 2R big hit. In S2011, in order to start a small hit game, a small hit game opening command is set (S2011), a small hit game opening period is started (S2012), and the special figure operation status is set to "5" ( S2013). Then, the main control unit 80 transmits the set small hitting opening command to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201), and receives the small hitting opening command. In 90, a predetermined game effect corresponding to the opening period is performed. If it is determined in S2009 that the small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2009), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game starts, so the special figure operation status is set to “1” (S2014), and the process ends. .

[Special electric equipment processing 1 (big hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 39, in the special electric accessory processing 1 (S1108), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (S2101). If it is determined that the probability variation flag is ON (YES in S2101), the probability variation is determined. The flag is turned OFF (S2102), and then it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time reduction flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time reduction flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. If NO is determined in S2101, the process proceeds to S2103 without turning off the probability variation flag. If NO is determined in S2103, the process proceeds to S2105 without turning off the time reduction flag. In other words, during the execution of the big hit game, the low probability state and the non-time-short state are controlled. In the first embodiment, since the low base state is always in the non-time-short state, the low base state is also controlled during the execution of the big hit game.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit end flag is ON (S2105). The big hit end flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) is all ended (the big hit game is ended) in the big hit game. If it is determined that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), then whether or not a predetermined round is being executed, that is, a big winning opening determined for the predetermined round (the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening) It is determined whether or not an open pattern (open / close pattern) is being executed (S2106). If it is determined in S2106 that the round is not being executed (S2106), it is then determined whether or not it is a round start time (S2107). This is determined based on the jackpot game release pattern set for each jackpot type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined based on whether or not it is the timing at which the opening period ends and the first release process of the first round is executed. If the first round has already been started, the determination is made based on whether the previous round has ended and a predetermined interval period has elapsed. The round is also simply referred to as “R”.

  If it is determined in S2107 that it is the time to start a round (YES in S2107), a round start command for the corresponding round is set (S2108), a big opening opening process is performed (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2110. As a result, the special winning opening becomes open and a predetermined round starts. In S2108, a round start command capable of specifying a round to be started is set, such as “1R start command” for the start of the first round and “2R start command” for the start of the second round. . The set round start command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process of S201. Also, in the big winning opening release process of S2109, a big hit release pattern determined according to the type of big hit to be executed, and an open pattern determined in the starting round is started. In S2110, whether the starting round is the V round (the first round or the second round), that is, the starting is the second big prize opening 35 (also referred to as “V attacker”) having the specific area 39 inside. It is determined whether it is a round in which the movable piece 150 is operated (a state in which the game ball can pass through the specific region 39) (S2110). In the present embodiment, two rounds of the first round and the second round are set as V rounds for operating the movable piece 150.

  If it is determined in S2110 that the starting round is not the V round (the first round or the second round), that is, the third round or later (NO in S2110), the process ends. This may be determined for each jackpot type using the value of the round counter, or may be determined by providing a round counter that counts the number of rounds to be executed separately. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2110 that the starting round is the V round (first or second round) (YES in S2110), the effective period of the specific area is set based on a predetermined specific area effective pattern. At the same time (S2111), an opening / closing operation of the specific area is started based on a predetermined specific area opening / closing operation pattern (S2112), and the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2107 that it is not the round start time (NO in S2107), the process ends. Here, as a case where it is determined that it is not the round start time, for example, during the opening period before the start of one round or during the interval period after the end of the round can be cited.

  Here, in the V round, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a and the V flag is turned ON, the game state display 46 is set to a predetermined display mode, and the game state after the big hit game is highly probable. Informs that it will be in a state. Specifically, the game status indicator 46 is composed of three LEDs “a1a2a3”. In the first embodiment, in the normal state (low probability state), the display mode is “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □” (for example, □: unlit, ■: lit). In addition, when the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a in the big hit game and the V flag is turned ON, the display mode of “a1 • a2 • a3 •” is set. When the big hit game ends and the gaming state is set to a high probability state, the display mode is “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □”. In addition, the lighting control timing of the game state indicator 46 is not limited to such timing, and during the big hit game, the display mode of “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □” is maintained even if the game ball passes a specific area. , “A1a2a3 □” may be displayed at the timing of transition to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game, and “a1 □ a2 □ a3 □” may be displayed at the timing of transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. .

  That is, in the specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 42), which will be described later, the V flag is turned ON only when V passage (passing of the game ball to the specific area 39) is detected during the V effective period, and outside the V effective period (V ineffective The V flag is not turned ON even if V passage is detected during the period. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON at a predetermined timing. That is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (a gaming state setting process (FIG. 36 described later)). In this way, the V flag is not turned on based on the passage of V due to an illegal act, that is, it is not illegally set to a high probability state.

  In the first embodiment, in the V effective period setting process (S2111), even when the 15R second big hit is detected, the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is set to a period (first period) that is determined to be effective. However, as another aspect, in the case of 15R second big hit, the first period may not be set in the 1R and 2R. That is, in the case of 15R second big hit, the 1R and 2R may be set as the second period. In the big hit game related to the 15R second big hit, since the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 is set to an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds, the possibility that the game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 is Although it is as low as possible, if the second period is set, the V flag will not be turned ON even if a ball is entered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the V flag from being turned on illegally or the V flag from being turned on due to a rare ball entry. In this embodiment, the V round is the first and second rounds, but other rounds may be set, the V round may be only one round, or three or more rounds. May be set.

  If it is determined in S2106 that a round is being executed (YES in S2106), the number of balls entered into the big winning opening in that round is the prescribed maximum number of balls (10 in this embodiment 1 per round). It is determined whether or not it has been reached (S2113). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2113), it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the running round (whether all the open patterns defined in the round have been completed) (S2114). If it is determined in S2114 that it is not the end time of the round (NO in S2114), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2113 that the specified number of entered balls (the number of entered balls in the round is 10) has been reached (YES in S2113), or the end time of the round in S2114 (specified in the round) If it is determined that all open patterns have been completed (YES in S2114), that is, if either of the two round end conditions is satisfied, the process proceeds to S2115. In S2115, a round end command for the corresponding round is set (S2115), and the process proceeds to S2116. In S2115, a round end command capable of specifying a round to be ended is set, such as “1R end command” for the end of the first round and “2R end command” for the end of the second round. . The set round end command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process of S201. In S2116, a predetermined special winning opening closing process is executed (S2116), then the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2117), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is “0” (S2118). If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “0” (NO in S2118), the process ends to start the next round.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the round counter is “0” (YES in S2118), a jackpot ending command is set (S2119) as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, and a jackpot ending effect is provided. Start (S2120). Then, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (S2121), and the process is terminated. Note that the round counter is “0” if the round (round game) is executed 15 times if long hit (15R big hit), and round (round game) is 2 times if short hit (2R big hit). When executed, it becomes “0”.

  If the big hit end flag is ON in S2105 (YES in S2105), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether or not the execution time of the big hit ending effect has passed (S2122), and the ending time If it has not elapsed (NO in S2122), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the big hit end flag is turned OFF (S2123), and a game state setting process (S2124) described later is performed. Then, the big hit flag is turned off (S2125), the special figure operation status is set to “1” (S2126), and the process is terminated. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special figure operation process (FIG. 24).

[Game state setting process]
As shown in FIG. 40, in the game state setting process (S2121), it is first determined whether or not the V flag is ON (S2201). The V flag is a flag that is turned on in a specific area sensor detection process (FIG. 35) described later. If it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is ON (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), the probability variation counter is set to “140” (S2203), and the V flag is turned OFF (S2204). , The process proceeds to S2205. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined whether or not to set the gaming state after the big hit game to a high probability state based on whether or not the V flag is ON in this gaming state setting process.

  In S2205, it is determined whether or not the finished jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is 15R jackpot. If it is determined that it is not 15R big hit, that is, 2R third big hit (NO in S2205), then the game state before the big hit game, that is, the game state at the time of 2R third big hit is a time-short state or not Is determined (S2208). If it is determined that the time saving state has not been reached (NO in S2208), the processing ends without turning on the time saving flag. As a result, the gaming state after the current big hit game becomes a high probability state, a special symbol non-short-time state, and a low base state (that is, a highly accurate low base state). This highly accurate and low base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the special symbol is displayed with 140 fluctuations and the next jackpot is generated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2205 that the finished jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2205), or the game state when the 2R third jackpot is hit in S2208 is a short-time state If it is determined (YES in S2208), the hour / hour flag is turned ON (S2206), “140” is set in the hour / hour counter (S2207), and the process ends. As a result, the gaming state after the current big hit game becomes a high probability state, a short time state of a special symbol, and a high base state (that is, a highly accurate high base state). This high-accuracy base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the special symbol is displayed with 140 fluctuations and the next jackpot is generated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2201 that the V flag is OFF (NO in S2201), similarly to the above, it is determined whether or not the completed big hit game (the big hit game executed this time) is 15R big hit (S2209). If it is determined in S2209 that it is not 15R big hit, that is, 2R third big hit (NO in S2209), then the game state before the big hit game, that is, the game state when 2R third big hit is reached It is determined whether or not it is in a state (S2210). If it is determined in S2210 that the time-short state has not been reached (NO in S2210), the process ends without turning on the time-short flag. As a result, the gaming state after the current big hit game becomes a low probability state, a special symbol non-short-time state, and a low base state (that is, a low probability low base state). On the other hand, if it is determined in S2209 that the finished jackpot game (the jackpot game executed this time) is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2209), or the game state when the 2R third jackpot is hit in S22100 is a short-time state. If it is determined that the time has elapsed (YES in S2210), the hour / hour flag is turned ON (S2211), the hour / hour counter is set to “100” (S2212), and the process ends. As a result, the gaming state after the current big hit game becomes a low probability state, a special symbol time-short state, and a high base state (that is, a low probability high base state). This low-accuracy base state ends when either of the following conditions is met: the special symbol is displayed 100 times to change and the next jackpot is generated. In addition, the time saving counter and the probability variation counter are for counting the number of times of adding the number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol and the number of times of fluctuation display of the second special symbol.

  In addition, in the case of 2R third big hit, the processing (S2208, S2210) for determining whether or not the game state before the big hit game is a short-time state is the operation state of the short-time function before and after the big hit game and the high base This is to make the operating state of the function (open extension function) the same as the small hit. If these operating states are different between the small hit and the 2R third big hit, even if it is difficult to recognize which hit is based on the opening pattern of the big prize opening, depending on the subsequent operating state, which hit (big hit) Or small hit). As a result, it is difficult to discriminate between the small hit and the 2R third big hit with the open pattern of the big winning opening, and it is also difficult to discriminate depending on the operating state of the time-shortening function or the high base generating function that occurs thereafter.

[Special electric equipment processing 2 (small hit game)]
As shown in FIG. 41, in the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hitting end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. If it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), whether or not the big winning opening (the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35) is being opened, that is, for the small hit It is determined whether the release pattern is being executed (S2302). If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening is not open (NO in S2302), whether or not the timing (timing) for opening the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) has been reached, that is, a small hit opening It is determined whether the period has elapsed and the time (timing) for starting a predetermined opening operation has been reached (S2303).

  If it is determined in S2303 that it is not the time to open the special winning opening (NO in S2303), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2303 that it is time to open the big winning opening (YES in S2303), V invalidation period setting processing is performed (S2304), and the second big winning opening is made according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 7). 35 is released (S2305), and the process ends. In the V invalid period setting process (S2304), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is invalidated for a few seconds after the second big prize opening 35 is opened and after the second big prize opening 35 is closed in the small hit game. The period to be determined (second period) is set. In the first embodiment, a period other than the period set as the valid period in the above-described V valid period setting process (S2111) is set as an invalid period (second period). Therefore, in this V invalid period setting process, it is confirmed whether it is not the valid period, that is, whether it is set to the invalid period. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the V timer (provided in the RAM of the main control board 80) that measures the elapse of the V effective period is set to “0” (that is, the state without the effective period). To do. If the V timer is not “0”, the V timer is set to “0”. Note that “0” is set in the V timer without checking whether the V timer is “0” or not. That is, it may be set to a state where there is no valid period. Thus, even if there is a V passage during the small hit, if the gaming state before the small hit game is the normal state, the gaming state after the small hit game is not shifted to the high probability state. However, since the movable piece 150 that allows passage through the specific area 39 does not operate during the small hit game, the game ball will not pass through the specific area unless an unexpected situation (failure, malfunction, fraud, etc.) occurs. .

  If it is determined in S2302 that the big prize opening (second big prize opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during the small hit game is the prescribed maximum number It is determined whether the number has reached the number (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If the specified number of balls has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the releasing operation (whether all the small hit opening patterns have been completed) (S2307). If it is determined that the opening operation of the special winning opening has not ended (NO in S2307), the process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S2306 that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening during the small hit game has reached the specified number of balls entered (YES in S2506), or in S2307, the opening of the big prize opening is completed. If it is determined that it is time (YES in S2307), a predetermined big prize closing process is performed (S2308), and the process proceeds to S2311. That is, as a condition for ending the small hit game, (1) the opening operation defined for the small hit game being executed is completed (for example, 0.9s is released twice) (2) the small hit game being executed 2, two conditions are established: a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) entered. When either one of the conditions is satisfied, the end condition for the small hit game is satisfied based on the previously established condition. In S2311, as a small hit end process for ending the small hit game, a small hit game ending command is set (S2311), a small hit ending period is started (S2312), and the small hit end flag is turned ON (S2313). ) Finish the process. Here, in the small hit end process in S2311, a process for setting an ending command is performed, and the ending command for the small hit is set. The ending period for small hits is the same as the ending period for the 2R third big hit, which makes it difficult to distinguish the small hit from the 2R third big hit.

  If it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), then it is determined whether the small hit ending period (ending time) has passed (S2315), and the ending period has passed. If it is determined that it is not (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2315 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned OFF (S2316), the small hit flag is turned OFF (S2317), and the special figure operation status is set to “1”. ”(S2318), and the process ends. Thus, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol standby process (S1102) is executed again as the special figure operation process (FIG. 24). Note that the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are not switched from ON to OFF at the start of the small hit game. Also, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process (S2124, FIG. 33) is not performed. That is, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Specific area sensor detection processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a specific area sensor detection process (S207) subsequent to the special figure operation process (S206). In the specific area sensor detection process (S207), as shown in FIG. 42, first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 39a (S2401). If it is determined that there is no detection (NO in S2401), the process ends. If it is determined in S2401 that there is a detection (YES in S2401), it is determined whether or not the V is valid (S2402). The V effective period is a period set in the V effective period setting process (S2111) in the special electric accessory process 1 (FIG. 39) described above. The V validity period is set for the first and second rounds in the jackpot game.

  If it is determined in S2402 that the V validity period is in effect (YES in S2402), the V flag is turned ON (S2403), and whether or not the big hit game currently being executed is a 2R big hit (2R third big hit). Is determined (S2404). If it is determined that it is not 2R big hit (NO in S2404), that is, if it is 15R big hit, the first V passing command is set (S2405), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that 2R is a big hit (YES in S2404), the second V passing command is set (S2406), and the process ends. The CPU of the main control board 80 transmits this V passing command to the sub control board 90 at a predetermined timing, and the sub control board 90 displays the effect symbol display according to the type of the received V passing command, the gaming state at that time, and the like. Execute game effects in the area.

  If it is determined in S2402 that the V valid period is not in effect (NO in S2402), the invalid period passing command is set without turning on the V flag (S2407), and the process ends. In principle, the first V pass command is a command for causing the sub-control board 90 to perform V pass notification control. On the other hand, the second V pass command is a command for preventing the sub control board 90 from performing V pass notification control in principle. Further, the invalid period passing command indicates that the game ball has passed the specific area during the invalid period of the specific area on the main control board 80 or the sub control board 90. That is, it is a command for notifying that there is a possibility that some trouble or fraud has occurred. This notification may be performed using the display screen 7a, a frame lamp, a panel lamp, a speaker, or the like, or may be performed in the hall computer by transmitting the information to the hall computer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a specific area sensor detection process (S207) and a V valid period setting process (S2111), thereby switching the validity / invalidity of the passing of the game ball to the specific area 39. It functions as (specific area state switching means).

[Processing at start-up]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs a start and entry process (S208) following the specific area sensor detection process (S207). As shown in FIG. 43, in the starting and entering ball process (S208), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out. (S2501). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 reserved ball number has increased by “1” (S2502). If it is determined in S2502 that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S2502), the process proceeds to S2503. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved figure 2 reserved balls in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second start port.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S2502), the process proceeds to S2506. In S2503, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit is read ( S2503). Next, in S2504, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S2504). Specifically, depending on the current gaming state (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state), the value of the special symbol success / failure determination random number counter (random number value for special symbol success / failure determination) acquired at the time of entering the starting gate And determine whether it is a big hit or missed. When the determination result (preliminary determination result) is a big hit, the type of the big hit is determined. This is a pre-determination (so-called “hold”) in which the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is held (determination of whether or not it is a big hit) is performed prior to the determination (S1303, S1309) in the special figure 2 determination process (S1202) described later. Is equivalent to “look-ahead”).

  The prior determination is a jackpot determination table corresponding to the set game mode (see FIG. 9A). If the probability is high, the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, the normal state (low If it is a probability state), it is possible to determine whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as other prior determination modes, as a variation pattern information determination table capable of determining variation pattern information, a variation pattern information determination table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a high probability state (for a high probability state) And a variation pattern information determination table. In advance determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on an acquired random number value (a value of a random symbol counter for special symbol success / failure determination or the like) and a variation pattern information determination table corresponding to the gaming state. Is possible. Then, from the selected variation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not a big hit type, a game effect having a high hit reliability is executed, or the like.

  Next, in S2505, game information including at least the reserved ball number data related to the second special symbol read out in S2501 and the information determined in advance in S2504 (pre-determined information) is generated as a special figure 2 start entering command. Then, it is set in an output buffer for command transmission to the sub control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2505). In addition, as a special figure 2 start entering command, a part or all of the special figure 2 acquisition random number value read in S2503 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the special figure 2 acquisition random number value may be transmitted. The game information acquired based on the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number (for example, the above-described variation pattern information, etc.) may be transmitted.

  Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start incoming ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub control unit 90, whether or not it is information related to the big hit, the number of held balls of the second special symbol, Can be identified by the sub-control unit 90. In addition, in the first embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entering command, whether or not the obtained special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when determined in a high probability state, and low It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when judged in the probability state. Thereby, the sub-control unit stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as a hold (effect hold information), pre-determines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not it is a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not production hold information determined to be a big hit is stored.

  From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is not directly transmitted to the sub-control unit among the acquired random number values read out in S2503, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other big hit type (big hit) Special command data including type determination random number value), reach random number counter value (reach random number value), variation pattern random number counter value (variation pattern random number value), and information indicating the result of prior determination It can be generated and set as a two-start entry command.

  Next, in S2506, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 has increased by “1” as in the process related to the special figure 2 described above (S2506). If it is determined in S2506 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has increased by “1” (YES in S2506), the process proceeds to S2507. This corresponds to the case where “1” is added to the number of reserved balls in FIG. 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2506 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls has not increased (NO in S2506), the process ends.

  In S2507, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is ON (S2507). If it is determined that the time reduction flag is ON, that is, it is in the high base state (YES in S2507), the processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2507 that the time reduction flag is OFF, that is, it is in the low base state (NO in S2507), the process proceeds to the pre-determination process after S2508. Here, when the time reduction flag is ON, that is, when the current gaming state is a high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of entering the second start port 21 is activated, and whether or not the special figure 2 is successful or not. It is in a state where it is easy to make a determination. In the first embodiment, as described later, the special figure 2 reserved digest (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in preference to the special figure 1 reserved digest (variable display of the first special symbol). (So-called special figure 2 priority variation machine). In such a configuration, for example, when the preliminary determination of FIG. 1 is performed, the result is notified to the player by an effect such as a notice, and when it is clearly shown that the result of the preliminary determination is a big hit, Using the priority of Special Figure 2 Reservation, intentionally remove Special Figure 2 suspension at any time (set it to “0”) and intend to win the big hits related to Special Figure 1 that shows the result of prior judgment Technical interventions such as automatic generation are possible. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of the fairness of the game that the player can adjust such a big hit occurrence timing. For this reason, when the current gaming state is not the low base state but the high base state (YES in S2507), the processing is terminated without performing the processing related to the prior determination in FIG. 1 after S2508.

  The processing of S2508 to S2510 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above with reference to FIG. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit is read (S2508), Preliminary determination is made on the read acquired random number value (S2509), and game information including at least the reserved ball number data relating to the first special symbol read in S2501 and information (preliminary determination information) determined in advance in S2509, As shown in FIG. 1, it is generated as a start entry command and set in an output buffer for command transmission to the sub control board 90 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 (S2510). The prior determination (holding prefetching) in S2509 is performed prior to the determination (S1603, S1609) in the special figure 1 determination process (S1207) described later.

[Power-off monitoring processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs power-off monitoring processing (S209) following the reserved ball number processing (S208). In the power-off monitoring process (S209), as shown in FIG. 44, it is first determined whether or not a power-off signal has been input (S2601). This is determined based on the “power-off signal” transmitted when the voltage drop monitoring circuit 105 detects a drop in the power supply voltage. If it is determined in S2601 that there is no power supply voltage input (NO in S2601), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2601 that there is an input of a power-off signal (YES in S2601), the game state information stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the game state stored in the payout control unit 110 Information is stored in the backup area of each RAM (S2602), the power-off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

  In addition, when the power-off signal is received, at least information indicating a set game mode (game mode setting information), a special symbol status flag, and a normal symbol status flag are stored as game state information to be backed up to be stored in the backup area. , The value of the pending storage counter (special figure, ordinary figure), the value of the probability change flag, the value of the short time flag, the information indicating the progress status of the big hit game, the information indicating the progress status of the small hit game, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol, Information indicating the number of unpaid prize balls can be given. The gaming state information is stored (stored) in a backup area (backup RAM) where power supply is maintained by a backup power source. In addition, these backed-up game state information includes the control state (game state) when the power supply is started again after a power failure occurs, and the control state (game) when a power failure occurs (before the power failure occurs). Information (data) necessary for recovery to (status)

[Mode setting monitoring processing]
Next, the mode setting monitoring process (S210) will be described with reference to FIG. This mode setting monitoring process is a process of constantly monitoring the setting state of the mode setting switch during power supply (after the game starts). In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the game mode setting can be changed only when the power is turned on and when the gaming machine is initialized. Even if the mode setting switch is operated (in the supply state), the game mode is not changed immediately. However, it is not preferable that the game mode actually set in the gaming machine does not match the game mode indicated by the operation unit 82a of the mode setting switch 82. Also, if there is such a discrepancy, there is a possibility that when a game clerk or the like confirms the setting of the gaming machine, the gaming mode set in the gaming machine may be mistaken. For example, there is a possibility that a situation in which a change has already been necessary but it has been mistaken for a change has already occurred.

  In order to prevent such a situation, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting state (selection information) of the mode setting switch 82 is constantly monitored (every predetermined control cycle), thereby preventing the above-described inconsistency. By quickly finding out and performing a predetermined notification (error notification), it is possible to notify the surroundings. Specifically, in the mode setting monitoring process (S210), first, selection information of the mode setting switch is read (S3201), then, a game mode corresponding to the read selection information, a game mode stored in the RAM, That is, the game mode currently set in the gaming machine is compared and determined (S3202). In S3203, if it is determined that the result of the comparison performed in S3202 matches (YES in S3203), it is determined whether an error is being notified (S3205). If it is determined that no error is being notified (S3205), the process is performed. Finish. This is the case if the setting state of the mode setting switch 82 is not changed accidentally or illegally after the game starts.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3203 that the result of the comparison performed in S3202 does not match (NO in S3203), a predetermined error notification is performed (S3204), and the process is terminated. In the error notification, an error display indicating that “the mode setting switch has been illegally operated” is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7, or a predetermined error notification is given by the panel lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, or the speaker 67. It is possible to go. In error notification, both the correct game mode setting and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch may be indicated in some manner. Thereby, the setting position of the game mode by the mode setting switch 82 can be quickly corrected (returned), and the error notification can be ended. This error processing (error notification) is performed while maintaining a state where the game can be continued. This is because the game mode cannot be changed unless the gaming machine is initialized (the game mode is not changed).

  Also, during this error notification (during error processing), if S3203 is executed again and it is determined that they match (YES in S3203), then it is determined whether error notification is being performed (S3205) and it is determined that error notification is being performed If YES (YES in S3205), the error notification is terminated (S3206), and the process is terminated. Thereby, it is possible to return to a normal game without error notification. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment monitors the operation of the mode setting switch 82 during the power supply, and based on the restored game state information while the power supply is stopped. It is possible to monitor by determining whether or not it matches the game mode at the time of power interruption. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game mode from being changed illegally or mistakenly.

[Sub control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the counter, flag, status, buffer, and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (sub control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided in the sub control board 90 reads and executes the program of the sub control main process shown in FIG. 46 from the ROM of the sub control board 90. . As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, a CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) setting, various flags, status and counter reset, etc. are performed.

  Subsequently, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4011. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4011 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the RAM contents are not normal even if the power-off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub control board 90 is initialized. If the power-off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are maintained normally (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. If the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset. In S4011, initial processing for performing setting notification (notification processing) when there is a game mode setting change, which will be described later, and operation confirmation (initial operation) of the movable decorative members 14 and 17 (board movable portion and frame movable portion). (S4011) and the process proceeds to S4004. Note that S4001 to S4003 and S4011 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed thereafter.

  In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, random number seed update processing is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. The updated random number counter value is sequentially stored in a predetermined update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The effect determining random number includes a notice effect determining random number for determining the notice effect and an effect design determining random number for determining the effect symbol. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Random values may not be added one by one at the time of update, but may be added two by two. The effect determining random number is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, a control signal (start start ball command) notifying that a start ball has been sent from the main control board 80, or a control signal (notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80) ( For example, when a variation start command) is transmitted, or when a variation effect pattern to be described later is determined. The storage location of the acquired effect determination random number is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In the first embodiment, as a random number for determining a notice effect, a random number for determining a character notice, a random number for determining a step-up notice, a random number for determining a pseudo-variable notice, and a random number for determining a moving part notice are provided. The notice effect to be executed is determined using the obtained value of the effect determination random number and each notice determination table.

  When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various rendering devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, panel lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. A production (production design game production, special game production accompanying a big hit game and a small hit game, etc.) is executed. Next, the production control microcomputer 91 permits interruption (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of effect symbols executed on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display area 7b) of the image display device 7, lighting control of various lamps, and operation of the movable decorative member Control, audio output control from a speaker, and the like can be performed.

[Initial processing]
Next, an initial process (S4011) executed when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. This initial process (S4011) is a process executed when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and is executed once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and is not executed thereafter. Further, in the initial process, mainly, setting notification on the display screen 7a (production symbol display unit 7b) when the setting is changed, and initial operation of the movable decorative members 14 and 17 (frame movable unit and panel movable unit). And is executed. In addition, when the setting is changed, the execution timing of the setting notification is changed so that the visibility is not hindered by the initial operation of the movable decorative members 14 and 17 (the frame movable portion and the panel movable portion). It is different from the case where it is made and the case where it is not made.

  Specifically, in the initial process (S4011), it is first determined whether a setting change command has been received from the main control unit 80 (S4101). If it is determined in S4101 that a setting change command has been received, that is, it has been determined that the setting has been changed by the control of the main control unit 80 (the setting has been changed) (YES in S4101), A setting notification command is transmitted (S4102), a frame movable initial operation start command for executing an initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is transmitted (S4103), and the process proceeds to S4104. By transmitting the setting notification command, the sub-control unit 90 executes setting notification (setting change notification) on the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) via the image control unit 100 (image control board). Display control is executed. In addition, the execution mode of the setting notification (setting change notification) of the present embodiment is the mode shown in FIG. 50A, and the setting change is performed by executing the character display of “setting changed” for 5 seconds. Indicates what has been done. Further, instead of such a mode, it may be displayed specifically which game mode is set, which game mode is changed to which game mode, and the like.

  In addition, by transmitting the frame movable initial operation start command, the sub control unit 90 starts the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable unit) via the lamp control board 107. The movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is provided with a detected piece (not shown) that rotates with the rotation of the movable decorative member. The initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 is to drive and control the drive source (stepping motor) to rotate the movable decorative member 17 about 1800 degrees (5 rotations) with the rotation axis as a fulcrum. It is set as the operation | movement aspect which stops at the position detected with the sensor 17b (predetermined initial operation | movement aspect). It should be noted that the execution period of the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 is completed in 8 seconds if there is no malfunction (mechanism or sensor malfunction). In addition, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) only rotates at the position where the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is installed. Accordingly, the movable decorative member 17 does not move to a position overlapping the display screen 7a for performing setting notification in the execution process of the initial operation, that is, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 is set notification (setting change). Notification) visibility is not hindered.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the setting notification and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) executed after power-on are performed in parallel (see FIG. 49A). In addition, by enabling these to be executed in parallel, the initial operation can be quickly completed (completed), the gaming machine can be quickly played, and the confirmation time of the initial process by the game store clerk can be shortened, It is possible to increase the operating rate of gaming machines. In addition, as shown in FIG. 50B, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable portion) is a process in which the movable decorative member 14 executes the initial operation. If the setting notification and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 are executed at the same time (in parallel) because the position passes (positions or moves) on the display screen 7a displaying the setting notification, the setting is performed. There is a possibility that the visibility of the notification may be hindered. Therefore, as will be described later, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable portion) is executed after the setting notification for a predetermined time (5 seconds) is performed (after the setting notification is completed). And When the board movable initial operation shown in FIG. 50 (b) is finished and the initial process is finished, the display mode shown in FIG. 50 (c) is set, and a game is possible.

  In S4104, it is determined whether 5 seconds (specific notification time) has elapsed since the start of setting notification. If it is determined that 5 seconds (specific notification time) has not elapsed (NO in S4104), the determination in S4104 is performed again. I do. If it is determined in S4104 that the setting notification execution time (execution period) has passed 5 seconds (specific notification time) (YES in S4104), the process proceeds to S4105. Note that timer means for measuring the setting notification execution time is provided, and it is determined whether or not the setting notification execution time has reached the specific notification time by determining the time value of the timer means. In this embodiment, the specific notification time is set to 5 seconds. However, if the game mode setter such as a game store clerk recognizes that the setting has been changed, it is sufficient time. Other lengths (long or short) may be used. In addition, the frame moving initial operation is also executed in parallel during the period in which this setting notification is being executed.

  In S4105, it is determined whether or not the frame movable initial operation that is executed in parallel with the setting notification is completed (S4105). In this embodiment, since the frame movable initial operation time (8 seconds) is set longer than the specific notification time (5 seconds), the initial determination is that the frame movable initial operation has not ended. . If it is determined in S4105 that the frame movable initial operation has not ended, that is, after the predetermined initial operation has been executed, the origin sensor 17b has not yet detected the detected piece (NO in S4105), then the frame It is determined whether a set time (limit time set for the frame movable initial operation) has elapsed since the start of the movable initial operation. This is because if the drive source, drive mechanism, origin sensor, etc. malfunctions or malfunctions (damage, contamination, etc.), the origin piece 17b detects the detected piece no matter how much time passes after the initial operation starts. There is a possibility that the initial operation will not be completed.

  In order to prevent such a situation, a time longer than the frame movable initial operation time (8 seconds) determined for the frame movable initial operation is defined as a set time (limit time), and this set time (in this embodiment, If the frame movable initial operation is not completed even after the setting of 12 seconds), an error notification is executed and the process proceeds to the next process. Specifically, when it is determined in S4107 that the set time (12 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the frame movable initial operation (YES in S4107), frame movable error notification is executed (S4108), and the process proceeds to S4106. In the frame movement error notification, the characters “frame movement error” are displayed on the display screen 7a to notify that the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) has some problem.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S4107 that the set time (12 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the frame movable initial operation (NO in S4107), it is determined again whether the frame movable initial operation has been completed (S4105). If it is determined that the frame movable initial operation has been completed after multiple determinations of S4105 (YES in S4105), then a panel movable initial operation start command is transmitted (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4109. That is, after the setting notification of the specific setting notification time is completed and the frame movable initial operation is completed (or the set time has elapsed without being completed), the panel movable initial operation is started. Thereby, it is possible to end the setting notification of the specific notification time (5 seconds) and the frame movable initial operation before the execution of the initial movable panel operation that covers a part of the display portion of the display screen 7a. It becomes. This also prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that there has been a setting change from being disturbed by the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable portion), and reliably notifies that there has been a setting change. It becomes possible to do.

  In addition, since the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is also completed before the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable portion) is started, the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable portion) is completed. Before starting, the setting notification time is ensured, and the initial operations of the movable decorative member 14 and the movable decorative member 17 are executed separately, so that the respective initial operations can be executed reliably. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the occurrence of a situation where a large number of movable decorative members 14 and 17 operate simultaneously and drive power is insufficient. In addition, the frame movable initial operation that does not impair the visibility of the setting notification can be executed in parallel after the setting notification, so that the initial processing is completed as quickly as possible and the game can be quickly played. Make it possible.

  In S4109, it is determined whether or not the panel movable initial operation has been completed (S4109), and it is determined that the detected piece has not yet been detected by the origin sensor 14b after the predetermined initial operation has been executed. If this is the case (NO in S4109), it is then determined whether or not a set time (limit time set for the initial movable panel operation) has elapsed since the start of the initial movable panel operation. This is because, like the frame movable initial operation described above, when a failure or malfunction (breakage, contamination of foreign matter, etc.) occurs in the drive source, drive mechanism, origin sensor, etc., some time elapses after the initial operation starts. This is because the detected piece is not detected by the origin sensor 17b, that is, the initial operation may not be completed.

  In order to prevent such a situation, a time longer than the panel movable initial operation time (6 seconds) determined for the panel movable initial operation is defined as a set time (limit time), and this set time (in this embodiment, If the panel movable initial operation is not completed even after elapse of 9 seconds), an error notification is executed and the process proceeds to the next process. Specifically, if it is determined in S4110 that the set time (9 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the panel movable initial operation (YES in S4110), a panel movable error notification is executed (S4111), and the initial process is terminated. In the panel movement error notification, the characters “panel movement error” are displayed on the display screen 7a to notify that there is some malfunction in the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable part). On the other hand, if it is determined in S4109 that the initial operation for moving the panel has been completed (YES in S4109), the initial process is terminated.

  FIG. 49A is a diagram showing an approximate timing of the initial process executed when it is determined in S4101 that the setting change command has been received in the timing chart shown in [Setting Change: Initial Process]. According to this, the setting notification (t1 → t2) and the frame movable initial operation (t1 → t3) are executed (started) in parallel, and after both the setting notification and the frame movable initial operation are completed, the panel movable initial operation is performed. (T4 → t5) is started.

  If it is determined in S4101 that no setting change command has been received, that is, the setting has not been changed by the control of the main control unit 80 (NO in S4101) (NO in S4101), [Initial processing when setting is not changed] [Processing without setting change (S4112)] is executed, and the processing is terminated. When the setting change command is not received, the sub control unit 90 does not perform setting notification on the display screen 7a. This makes it possible to quickly end the initial process when there is no change in the game mode setting.

  In the processing without setting change (S4112), first, a frame movable initial operation start command for executing the initial operation of the movable decorative member 17 (frame movable portion) is transmitted (S4201), and then the movable decorative member 14 (panel movable) Panel initial operation start command for executing the initial operation (S4202) is transmitted (S4202), and the process proceeds to S4203. By S4201 and S4202, the movable decorative member 14 and the movable decorative member 17 start the initial operation in parallel. When it is determined that the setting change command has not been received (the setting change state is not set), the setting notification is not performed on the display screen 7a that is controlled by the sub-control unit. The initial frame moving operation and the panel moving initial operation are executed simultaneously (in parallel) without securing the above.

  This is because the setting notification is not made on the display screen 7a, and thus the visibility of the setting notification is not hindered even if the panel movable initial operation that can cover the display screen 7a is started immediately. Thereby, it is possible to quickly end the initial process (initial operation) that is executed when the game mode setting is not changed, and to make the game possible state as soon as possible. In S4203, it is determined whether or not the frame movable initial operation has ended (S4203). If it is determined that the frame movable initial operation has not ended (NO in S4203), then the set time (limit time) has elapsed since the frame movable initial operation started. It is determined whether or not (S4204). If it is determined in S4204 that the set time has not elapsed, it is determined again whether the frame movable initial operation has ended. If it is determined that the set time has elapsed, a frame movable error notification is executed, and S4206 Move on to processing. In addition, these processes (S4203 to S4205, S4206 to S4208) are the same as the processes executed when the setting change command described above is received. If it is determined in S4206 that the panel movable initial operation has been completed (YES in S4206), the process ends.

  FIG. 49B is a diagram showing an approximate timing of the initial process executed when it is determined in S4101 that the setting change command has not been received in the timing chart shown in [No setting change: initial process]. According to this, the setting notification is not executed, the frame movable initial operation (t6 → t8) and the panel movable initial operation (t6 → t7) are executed (started) in parallel, and the frame movable initial operation and the panel movable initial operation are performed. This indicates that the initial process is terminated after both of the processes are completed.

[Other aspects of initial processing 1]
Next, another aspect 1 of the initial process will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 53 (AA). Description of parts common to the initial processing of the first embodiment described above will be omitted, and differences will be described. In the aspect of Example 1 described above, the initial operation (panel movable initial operation) of the movable decorative member 14 is executed after both the setting notification and the frame movable initial operation are completed. Instead of such a mode, in another mode 1, the panel movable initial operation is started (without waiting for the end of the frame movable initial operation) after the setting notification of the specific notification time (5 seconds) is completed. It was.

  Specifically, since S4151 to S4154 of other aspects 1 (S4011) of the initial process shown in FIG. 51 are the same as the initial process of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. If it is determined in S4154 that the specific notification time (5 seconds) has elapsed since the setting notification start (YES in S4154), then a panel movable initial operation start command is transmitted (S4155), and the initial operation of the movable decorative member 14 is performed. Start. Then, in S4156 to S4158, an end process of the frame movable initial operation is performed, and in S4159 to S4160, an end process of the panel movable initial operation is performed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 53 (AA) [with setting change: initial processing], after the setting notification (tt1 → tt2) for a predetermined period (5 seconds) is completed, the frame movable initial operation (tt1 → tt4) is performed. If it is being executed, the panel movable initial operation (tt3 → tt5) is started in parallel with the frame movable initial operation without waiting for the completion of the frame movable initial operation. When is finished, the initial process is finished. Thereby, it is possible to finish the initial process as soon as possible without disturbing the visibility of the setting notification by the initial movement of the board and to make the gaming machine in a playable state.

[Other aspects 2 of initial processing]
Next, another aspect 2 of the initial process will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53 (AAA). Description of parts common to the other aspects 1 described above will be omitted, and differences will be described. In the first embodiment and the other aspect 1 described above, when the setting notification for the specific notification period (5 seconds) ends, the setting notification ends and the process proceeds to another process. In place of such an aspect, in the other aspect 2, the setting notification is continued even after the setting notification for the specific notification period (5 seconds) is executed, and other initial processing (frame movable initial operation and / or board) is performed. The setting notification is terminated at the end of the movable initial operation. Thereby, it becomes possible to perform setting notification reliably by the setting person etc. of game mode by setting notification.

  Specifically, since S4151 to S4154 of the other aspect 2 (S4011) of the initial process shown in FIG. 52 are the same as the initial process of the other aspect 1, description thereof is omitted. Here, in S4154, when it is determined that the specific notification time (5 seconds) has elapsed since the setting notification start (YES in S4154), the setting notification is continued without being terminated (even if the display mode is changed) A board movable initial operation start command for starting the board movable initial operation is transmitted (S4155). Further, since S4156 to S4161 are the same as the initial processing of the other aspect 1, the description thereof is omitted. In another mode 2, when it is determined in S4159 that the panel movable initial operation has ended (YES in S4159), a setting notification end command for ending the setting notification on the display screen 7a that has been continuously executed Is transmitted (S4162), and the initial process is completed. That is, in the other mode 2, as shown in FIG. 53 (AAA) [with setting change: initial processing], setting notification (s1 → s5) and frame movable initial operation (s1 → s4) are started in parallel. After the setting notification of the specific notification period (5 seconds), the panel movable initial operation (s3 → s5) is started. And after starting the panel movable initial operation, the setting notification is continued on the display screen 7a, and as the panel movable initial operation (frame movable initial operation and panel movable initial operation) ends (as an opportunity) The setting notification is terminated and the initial process is terminated.

  Thereby, it is possible to extend the execution time of the setting notification without extending the execution time of the initial process, and to reliably perform the setting notification by a game mode setter or the like. Further, in the panel movable initial operation, the movable decorative member 14 covers a part of the display screen 7a in a part of the initial operation, but does not cover the entire display screen 7a, and always covers during the initial operation. I don't know. Therefore, if the setting notification is given during the initial period of the movable panel movement, the visibility of the setting notification may be hindered, but there is also a timing at which it is possible to visually recognize the setting notification. It is. In addition, since an engine that performs setting notification is ensured without impairing visibility before the start of the panel movable initial operation, setting notification that is easy to recognize can be performed more reliably. In addition, this makes it possible to finish the initial process as soon as possible without putting the visibility of the setting notification through the initial movement of the board, so that the gaming machine can be in a playable state.

[Other aspects of initial processing]
Further, both the frame movable initial operation and the panel movable initial operation may be started after the setting notification is finished (after the specific notification time has elapsed). Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify the visibility of the setting notification without the possibility of obstructing the visibility of the decorative movable member. At this time, the frame movable initial operation and the panel movable initial operation may be executed in parallel, or either one may be executed first and the other may be executed later. In addition, the initial operation of the movable decorative member means that the detection sensor for controlling the operation (drive source and operating mechanism) and position of the movable decorative member is inspected at the time of turning on the power, or when the power is turned on. This is an operation for moving (positioning) the movable decorative member portion to the initial position (origin position) at the start of the game. Such a process is also referred to as an origin return operation.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above determines whether or not the initialization flag is ON in the mode setting process (see FIG. 14) following the initial setting process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 14). When it is ON, that is, when the gaming machine is initialized (RAM is initialized) and started up (started up), the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read, and the game mode corresponding to the selection information is set. It was possible to change. On the other hand, when the initialization flag is not ON, that is, when the gaming state (control state) at the time of power interruption is restored based on the gaming state information stored in the backup area (161, 162), the mode setting switch 82 is also used. Processing to read the selection information. Then, as a result of performing the recovery process based on the game state information stored in the backup area (161, 162), the game mode at the time of power interruption stored in the RAM of the main control unit 80 and the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 If the game mode corresponding to is different, the game mode setting is not changed, and error processing (error notification) is executed. Further, it is assumed that the game cannot be started without shifting to the interrupt process (S105) until this error process is completed, that is, until it is determined as a match in the match determination.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment as described above, although the effect against fraud is extremely high, there is a possibility that the operating rate of the gaming machine may be lowered due to the fact that the game is not started until it is determined to match. Therefore, in the mode setting process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment is only when the initialization flag is ON at the time of power-on, that is, when the gaming machine is initialized and started up as in the first embodiment. The selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is read, and the setting can be changed to the game mode corresponding to the selection information. On the other hand, when the initialization flag is OFF, unlike the first embodiment, the mode setting process is terminated as it is. This makes it possible to change the setting of the game mode when the power is turned on with the initialization of the gaming machine, and disables the setting change of the game mode when the power is turned on without the initialization of the gaming machine. However, even if the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 is changed, such a situation is not monitored and error processing or the like is not performed. As a result, the game is started in the same game mode as when the power was restored when the power was turned on.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54, in the mode setting process (S106) of the second embodiment, first, whether the initialization flag is ON, that is, the RAM clear switch 83 is operated when the power is turned on to operate the RAM (161, 162). It is determined whether or not is initialized (S3191). If it is determined in S3191 that the initialization flag is ON (YES in S3191), the mode setting switch selection information is read (S3192), the game mode corresponding to the read selection information is set (S3193), and processing Finish. In this way, when the RAM including the backup area is initialized by starting the game machine by operating the RAM clear switch when the power is turned on, the mode setting switch selection information (setting change operation) is enabled. Thus, the game mode can be changed (set). On the other hand, if it is determined in S3191 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3191), the process ends. The game modes that can be set by this mode setting process are the same game mode 1 to game mode 5 as in the first embodiment. Since the structure and control processing of the gaming machine are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  Thereby, in the state where the game is started, the game mode corresponding to the selection information of the mode setting switch 82 may be different from the actual game mode set in the gaming machine. However, since the game mode setting can be changed only when the power is turned on with the initialization of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent (illegally) changing the game mode setting as much as possible. In addition, by making it possible to start a game, it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from being lowered. Further, after the start of the game, the mismatch between the actually set game mode and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch 82 is monitored by executing the mode setting monitoring process of the first embodiment. It is also possible to do.

  Next, a gaming machine according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 57. The gaming machine of the first embodiment can set an arbitrary gaming mode selected from the gaming mode 1 to the gaming mode 5 shown in FIG. 9 by operating the mode setting switch 82 under a specific change condition. It is said. The gaming machine according to the third embodiment selects and determines a gaming mode in a selection mode different from the first embodiment. Specifically, the gaming machine of the third embodiment includes three types (plurality) of game mode selection means (game mode setting means) as game mode selection means for selecting a game mode. First, similarly to the first embodiment, a game mode setting means (first game) in which a game mode setter selects and sets an arbitrary game mode from a plurality of game modes using the mode setting switch 82. Mode selection means). Second, game mode random selection means (second game mode selection means, random selection means) for randomly selecting and setting a game mode from a plurality of predetermined game modes is provided. Third, game mode fixed selection means (third game mode selection means, specific probability selection means) for setting the game mode to a predetermined specific game mode is provided.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the third embodiment includes (sets) a setting type switch 820 on the main control board 80 as shown in FIG. Then, an arbitrary setting type (game mode selection means) can be selected by sliding the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820 in the left-right direction under a specific condition. Specifically, when [A] at the left end is selected by the operation unit 820a, a game mode arbitrary selection unit (first game mode selection unit) is selected as the game mode selection unit. When the center [B] is selected by the operation unit 820a, the game mode random selection means (second game mode selection means) is selected as the game mode selection means. Further, when [C] at the right end is selected on the operation unit 820a, the game mode fixed selection means (third game mode selection means) is selected as the game mode selection means.

  When a game mode selection hand is selected as a game mode selection means, a game mode setter such as a game store clerk can set an arbitrary game mode. Therefore, it is necessary to set and arrange a gaming machine in a high setting game mode with a high probability of hitting and a gaming machine in a low setting mode with a low probability of hitting in a well-balanced manner. In addition, when the game mode random selection means is selected as the game mode selection means, a game mode setter such as a game shop clerk cannot grasp which game mode is set, and the game store side Makes it difficult to manage profits. However, since there is a possibility that a high game mode may be set for the player, the player's sense of expectation, gaming interest, and gambling are improved, and as a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine is improved. It is also possible to increase the profit. Further, when the game mode fixed selection means is selected as the game mode selection means, a predetermined specific game mode is set. In the third embodiment, when the game mode fixed selection means is selected in consideration of the profit balance on the game store side and the player side, the game mode 2 which is an intermediate setting is set. As a result, it is difficult for the game shop side to obtain a large profit, but it is possible to obtain a relatively balanced profit without obtaining a large loss. On the other hand, even from the player's side, it is unlikely that profits and losses will be excessive, and it is possible to play a well-balanced and moderately gambling game machine.

  Next, the mode setting process (S106) according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Description of the same parts as those of the mode setting process (S106) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 is omitted. In the mode setting process (S106) of the third embodiment, it is first determined whether or not the initialization flag is ON (S3101). When it is determined that the initialization flag is not ON, that is, the backed-up gaming state information has been restored (S3101). NO), the process proceeds to S3112. Since the processing from S3112 to S3119 is the same as that in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is ON, that is, the game state information is initialized by performing a predetermined input operation on the RAM clear switch (YES in S3101), then the mode setting key is It is determined whether or not it is ON, that is, whether or not the mode setting lock unit 92 is ON (S3102). If it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting lock unit 92 is in the OFF state, that is, the setting key has not been operated (NO in S3102), the process proceeds to S3111. Since the processing of S3111 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting lock unit 92 is in the ON state, that is, the setting key is operated (YES in S3102), then a random number for setting change is acquired (S3149), and the mode of S3150 The process proceeds to setting process 2 (S3150). Here, the “setting change random number” is a random number used when the game mode random selection means is selected as the game mode selection means. This setting change random number is composed of a counter value that is updated at a predetermined cycle from power-on, and this counter value acquired at the execution timing of S3149 is referred to as a setting change random value.

  In the mode setting process 2 (S3150), first, selection information of the setting type switch is read (S3151), and then it is determined whether or not the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is the setting type A (game mode arbitrary selection means). (S3152). The CPU of the main control unit 80 determines the setting type selected by the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820. If it is determined in S3152 that the setting type selected by the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820 is [A] (YES in S3152), a setting type A flag indicating that the game mode is set by the game mode arbitrary selection means Is turned ON (S3152), and the process proceeds to S3154. The processing of S3154 to S3159, specifically, the processing for setting the “gaming mode change state” and setting an arbitrary gaming mode during the period is the same as the processing of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Thereby, a game mode setter such as a game clerk operates the operation unit 82a of the mode setting switch 82 to set an arbitrary game mode selected from the game modes 1 to 5.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S3152 that the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is not the setting type A (NO in S3152), then the setting type selected by the setting type switch 820 is the setting type B (game). It is determined whether or not (mode random selection means) (S3162). If it is determined in S3162 that the setting type selected by the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820 is [B] (YES in S3162), a setting type B flag indicating that the game mode has been set by the game mode random selection means Is turned ON (S3163), and the process proceeds to S3164. In S3164, the game mode is set based on the random number for setting change acquired in S3149 (S3164), and information indicating that the game mode is randomly set by the game mode random selection means is displayed on the information display unit 88. (S3165), the process proceeds to S3169. Accordingly, a game mode randomly selected from the game modes 1 to 5 is set regardless of the intention of the game mode setter such as a game clerk.

  Here, “setting the game mode based on the acquired setting change random value” means that the setting change random number is composed of values from 0 to 99, and the acquired setting change random value is 0 to 99. In the case of 19, the game mode 1 is set, in the case where the obtained setting change random number value is 20 to 39, the game mode 2 is set, and in the case where the obtained setting change random number value is 40 to 59, the game mode 3 is set. If the set and changed random number for setting is 60 to 79, the game mode 4 is set. If the acquired random number for setting change is 80 to 99, the game mode 5 is set. In addition, the “information indicating that it is set at random” displayed in S3165 is, for example, a [RAND] character (indicating random) using the 7-segment display portion of the first to fourth information display portions. May be. Also, in the case of random setting, the set game mode is not displayed because the game store clerk confirms that the game mode is set to a game mode that is disadvantageous to the game store, and sets the game mode that is convenient for himself This is to prevent the random setting from being repeated by repeatedly turning the power ON / OFF until the operation is performed. This makes it possible to maintain fairness between the player side and the game store side when the game mode is set by the game mode random selection means.

  If it is determined in S3162 that the setting type selected by the operation unit 820a of the setting type switch 820 is not [B], that is, the selected setting type is [C] (NO in S3162), the game mode is fixed. The setting type C flag indicating that the game mode has been set by the selection means is set to ON (S3166), and the process proceeds to S3167. In S3167, game mode 2 which is a predetermined fixed game mode is set (S3167), the game mode (game mode 2) set in information display unit 88 is displayed (S3168), and the process proceeds to S3169. . The display mode of the information display unit is [--F2], and F is information indicating a fixed FIX. Thereby, a game mode setter such as a game clerk cannot select an arbitrary game mode, and the game mode 2 is forcibly set.

  In S3169, it is determined whether or not the mode setting key is OFF, that is, whether or not the setting key inserted into the mode setting lock has been returned to the OFF position (S3169). If it is determined that the mode setting key has been returned to the OFF position (YES in S3169) The process proceeds to S3160. If it is determined in S3169 that the position has not been returned to the OFF position (NO in S3169), the process of S43169 is repeatedly executed and the “game-ready state” is not shifted. In S3160, the mode change flag is turned OFF to end the “game mode change state” (S3160), the setting change flag described above is turned ON (S3161), a setting type specifying command is set (S3170), and the process is terminated.

  Here, in the third embodiment, it is determined by the “setting change flag” that the backed-up gaming state information has been erased (initialized) and the game mode setting has been changed, and the “setting type specifying command” It is possible to determine with which setting type the setting change of the game mode was made. Further, in the third embodiment, based on the “setting type specifying command”, it is notified which setting type the game mode is set to. As described above, since the display mode on the information display unit 88 when the game mode is set differs depending on which setting type the game mode is set to, the game clerk or the like displays this display mode (notification mode). As a result, it is possible to check which setting type is used.

  In addition, it is assumed that the player is notified of which setting type the game mode is set by using the “set type specifying command”. For example, using a frame lamp, a board lamp, or an image display device provided on the front side of the gaming machine, it is possible to make a notification in a notification mode in which the setting type can be specified (predictable). For example, by changing the light emission color, light emission pattern, blinking speed, etc. of the lamp, changing the background color, background type, display character, character, etc. of the liquid crystal, or making the sound output from the speaker different, It can be specified (predicted) by which setting type the game mode is set. Further, the notification mode capable of specifying the setting type is continued at least after the game mode setting is changed until the game is started (first special symbol variation display). Further, a “setting type specifying command” may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing, and a notification that can specify the setting type may be performed by a display unit or a speaker controlled by the sub-control unit 90. Of course, it is good also as what alert | reports a setting seed | species with the display part which can be controlled by the main control part 80 is performed.

  As another aspect, at least after changing the setting of the game mode, it may be continued until a special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). As another aspect, at least after a game mode setting change, it may continue until a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) elapses. Moreover, it is good also as what complete | finishes alerting | reporting based on the conditions established any earlier, combining these aspects. As a result, if there is a game machine whose setting has been changed, it is possible to notify to the player who plays the game machine for the first time after opening the game shop which setting type the game machine has been changed. It becomes. Thereby, it becomes possible for a player to select a gaming machine on which he / she plays based on the information, and to increase the number of players immediately after opening the store.

  As described above, the setting type switch 820 is operated with the power turned off. Then, the power is turned on in a state where any setting type (A to C) is selected by operating the operation unit 820a. Thereby, selection of the game mode by arbitrary setting seed | species is enabled. In addition, in order to change the setting of the game mode with an arbitrary setting type, as in the first embodiment, the setting type is selected with the power off, the mode setting lock is turned on, and the RAM It is necessary to turn on the power while the clear switch is turned on.

  This makes it possible to set the game mode in a wide variety of modes, and the player also increases the preference for selecting a gaming machine to play according to the setting mode on the game store side. This also enhances the entertainment interest.

  Next, a gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Although the gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes a notification unit that notifies the power-on mode (setting change with initialization, setting change without initialization, or setting change without initialization), the notification by the notification unit The aspect was mainly for a game clerk who is a power-on person. In the fourth embodiment, in addition to this, it is possible to notify the player of the power-on mode (setting change without initialization, setting change with initialization, or setting change without initialization).

  As shown in the power-on notification process (S107) of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 58, in this process, after S5102, a display command for notifying that “initialized but setting has not been changed” is issued. It is set (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5103. Following S5106, a display command for notifying that “initialization and setting change has been made” is set (S5109), and the process proceeds to S5103. Also, after S5107, a display command for notifying that “it has not been initialized and that the setting has not been changed (the game state information has been restored)” is set (S5110), and the process proceeds to S5103. ing. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  In the fourth embodiment, a display command for notifying that “initialized but setting has not been changed” is notified by a control process (not shown), in order to notify that “initialized and setting has been changed”. Or a display command for notifying that “it has not been initialized and the setting has not been changed (the game state information has been restored)” is transmitted to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing, It is good also as what alert | reports the power-on aspect with the display part and speaker which are controlled by the sub control part 90. That is, a different notification mode is executed depending on the power-on mode. Of course, it is good also as what alert | reports a setting seed | species with the display part which can be controlled by the main control part 80 is performed.

  Further, in order to notify the player, this notification mode is continued at least after the game mode setting is changed until the game is started (first special symbol variation display). As another aspect, at least after changing the setting of the game mode, it may be continued until a special symbol variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). As another aspect, at least after a game mode setting change, it may continue until a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes) elapses. Moreover, it is good also as what complete | finishes alerting | reporting based on the conditions established any earlier, combining these aspects. As a result, if there is a game machine whose setting has been changed, it is possible to notify to the player who plays the game machine for the first time after opening the game shop which setting type the game machine has been changed. It becomes. Thereby, it becomes possible for a player to select a gaming machine on which he / she plays based on the information, and to increase the number of players immediately after opening the store.

  Further, as another mode, an operation switch (not shown) is provided so that a game store clerk or the like can operate the operation switch (operation unit) to set whether or not to notify the player of the power-on mode. It may be.

  Next, a gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The circuit configuration of the fifth embodiment (mainly, the main control board 80, the payout control board 90, and the power supply board 109) is partially different from the circuit configuration of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The circuit configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59, focusing on differences from the first embodiment. Note that a description of portions common to the first embodiment is omitted.

  In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, a power supply board 109 that supplies driving power to the main control board 80, the payout control board 110, other control boards (sub control board 90, image control board 100), and the like is provided. I have. In the first embodiment, the stored contents of the backup area provided in the RAM of the main controller 80 and the backup area provided in the RAM of the payout controller 110 are erased by performing a predetermined input operation on the power supply board 109. A RAM clear switch 83 is provided for initialization. In the fifth embodiment, instead of this, the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 (both “specific switch”) has both the function of the RAM clear switch 83 of the first embodiment and the function of the mode setting switch 82 of the first embodiment. Say). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the main control board 80 is not provided with a mode setting switch 82 for changing the game mode setting (setting a predetermined game mode) (see FIG. 59).

  The RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is a push-type switch, and its structure is the same as the RAM clear switch 83 of the first embodiment. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the RAM clear switch of the first embodiment has both the function of the RAM clear switch and the function of the mode setting switch. This makes it possible to reduce costs and increase the common parts (common parts) of the board and its mounting parts as much as possible between gaming machines that have a gaming mode setting function and gaming machines that do not have a gaming mode setting function. Will be able to

  Also, the main control board 80 (main control unit) and the payout control board 110 (payout control part) of the fifth embodiment have backup areas 161 and 162 in the RAM, respectively, as in the first embodiment. The backup area 161 of the main control board 80 and the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 are backed up by a backup power supply (backup voltage) that the power supply unit of the power supply board 109 has. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine is stopped due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power OFF operation, even after the stop, for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged) The contents (game state information) of the backup target (memory holding target) stored in these RAMs are saved (stored). Means for storing and holding backup target information (data) stored in the backup areas 161 and 162 by the backup power source is referred to as “memory holding means”. The means for storing and holding backup target information (data) stored in the backup area 161 of the main control board 80 is referred to as “first storage holding means”, and the backup target information stored in the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 ( The means for storing and holding (data) is referred to as “second storage holding means”. The stored backup target information (data) is provided as a backup target information save area in the RAM of each control board 80 and 110, respectively.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, the backup area 161 of the main control board 80 includes an initialization area 171 including a first game information storage unit, and a non-initialization area 172 including a setting storage unit 174 and a base storage unit 175. have. The initialization area 171 and / or the non-initialization area 172 may have other areas. The initialization area 171 erases stored backup target information (data) by an operator such as a game clerk arbitrarily operating the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined manner. This is an area that can be initialized. That is, the initialization area 171 is an area where the area can be initialized by the operator as desired. By initializing, the player can start the game machine after initialization under the same conditions (hold 0, special symbol and normal symbol hold and no change display, low probability low base state, etc.). It becomes possible.

  The non-initialized area 172 is an area in which backup target information (data) cannot be erased even if an operator such as a game clerk operates the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830. That is, the non-initializing area 172 is an area where the area cannot be initialized by the operator. Even in the non-initialized area 172, if there is an abnormality in information (data) stored in the non-initialized area 172, a part or all of it is initialized. This is an area that cannot be initialized using a predetermined operation unit (RAM clear / mode setting switch 830). Therefore, when initialization is performed using the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830, the initialization target (erasure target) can be limited to information stored in the initialization area.

  In addition, the first game information storage unit 173 is provided as the initialization area 171 of the main control board 80. In the first game information storage unit 173, at least data indicating a gaming state (special symbol / normal symbol success / failure determination probability (high probability or low probability), base state (high base state or low base state)), special Data indicating the number of reserved symbols, data indicating special symbol hold information (judgment results, fluctuation patterns, etc.), data indicating the number of normal symbol holds, data indicating normal symbol hold information (determination results, fluctuation patterns, etc.), special Data indicating the success / failure determination result of the symbol / normal symbol, the remaining period in the high probability state, the remaining period in the high base state, etc., that is, data corresponding to the control state of the main control unit (special symbol status flag, ordinary symbol status flag Stored counter value, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.) are stored. The data stored in the first game information storage unit is referred to as “game information”. The data stored in the first game information storage unit 173 is stored and held (backed up) by the storage holding means (first storage holding means) when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected, and the power is restored. The stored data is restored. This data recovery means is referred to as “game information recovery means (first game information recovery means)”.

  In addition, as a non-initialized area 172 of the main control board 80, a setting storage unit 174 and a base storage unit 175 are provided. The setting storage unit 174 stores information indicating the set game mode (also referred to as “game mode information” or “setting information”), and the base storage unit 175 stores the base described in the first embodiment. Information (base values (first base value, second base value) is stored. Data (setting information) stored in the setting storage unit 174 is stored when a drop in power supply voltage is detected. The data is stored (backed up) by the holding means (second storage holding means), and the stored data (setting information) is restored when the power is restored. The data (base information) stored in the base storage unit 175 is stored by the storage holding means (third storage holding means) when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected. Is di (backup), with the power recovery, the storage holding data (base data) is restored. The data recovery method referred to as "gaming information recovery means (3 gaming information recovery means)".

  As described above, the setting information stored in the setting storage unit 174 and the base information stored in the base storage unit 175 are stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 by operating the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830. Even if it is changed, it is not erased (not initialized). That is, it is not subject to initialization operation. The setting information stored in the setting storage unit 174 can be changed by performing a predetermined setting change operation, but the base information stored in the base storage unit 175 Unless an abnormality occurs, the operator cannot arbitrarily change (initialize).

  Also, the initialization area 176 of the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 is similar to the initialization area 171 described above, and an operator such as a game shop clerk can arbitrarily set the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined manner. By performing this operation, the backup target information (data) stored (stored) is erased and initialized. That is, the operator arbitrarily operates the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 in a predetermined manner, so that both the initialization area 171 of the main control board 80 and the initialization area 176 of the payout control board 110 are initialized. Both initialization areas are initialized. Thus, the player can start the gaming machine after initialization under the same conditions (hold 0, special symbol and normal symbol hold and no change display, low probability low base state, prize ball, etc.). It becomes possible.

  Further, the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 has an initialization area 176 including a second game information storage unit 177. The initialization area 176 may have other areas, and the backup area 162 of the payout control board 110 stores information not to be initialized (information relating to game profits and prize balls). May be provided. The second game information storage unit 177 stores at least data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls (unpaid prize ball information). The data stored in the second game information storage unit is referred to as “game information”, “prize ball information”, or “game profit information”. The data stored in the second game information storage unit 177 is stored and held (backed up) by the storage holding means (fourth storage holding means) when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected. The stored data is restored. This data recovery means is referred to as “game information recovery means (fourth game information recovery means)”.

  Here, when only the power switch 84 is turned on in a state where power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment (power supply OFF state), the power supply voltage is supplied to the power supply substrate 109 and the power supply substrate 109 is also turned on. Therefore, necessary drive power is supplied to various control boards. Then, information (data) when the power is turned off (when power is reduced) is normally stored (stored in the memory) in each backup area (first game information storage unit, setting storage unit, base storage unit, second game information storage unit). ) (When there is no abnormality in the backup data), based on the information (data), it is possible to play the game after restoring the power-off (power-down) state (game state) (This is also referred to as “game state recovery means”, “game information recovery means” or “game state information recovery means”). On the other hand, when the power switch 84 is turned on, if the power switch 84 is turned on (switching from OFF to ON) while pressing the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 for a predetermined period, the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is turned on. Input information (RAM clear signal) of the mode setting switch 830 is input to the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit 110, and initialization areas 171 and 176 (first game) of the backup area (the main control unit 80 and the payout control unit 110). If there is information (data) stored in the information storage unit or the second game information storage unit), the information (data) stored in the initialization areas 171 and 176 is erased and initialized, and the game can be performed. (This is also referred to as “game information initialization means”). Thereby, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be initialized to the initial state.

  Also, the first game information stored and held by the memory holding means (first memory holding means) by performing the initialization (initialization operation) by operating the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 in the above-described predetermined manner. Game information in the storage unit 173 (information indicating the result of the special symbol success / failure determination, etc.) and game information in the second game information storage unit 177 stored and held in the storage holding unit (fourth storage holding unit) Information), the setting information of the setting storage unit 174 stored and held by the storage holding unit (second storage holding unit), and the base of the base storage unit 175 stored and held by the storage holding unit (third storage holding unit) Information can be recovered and initialized.

  The game mode change method (change operation method) in the fifth embodiment is substantially the same as that in the first embodiment, but the fifth embodiment does not include a mode setting switch on the main control board 80, and the power Since the game mode is set (setting operation) using the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 of the substrate 109, the method is partially different. Hereinafter, a method for changing the game mode of the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

  First, in a state where the power of the pachinko gaming machine is OFF, a setting key (not shown) is inserted into the insertion part 89a of the mode setting lock part 89, and the setting key is operated (rotated) from the OFF position to the ON position. Set lock part 89 is turned ON. Next, the power switch 84 is turned from OFF to ON while the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is pressed (while being pressed) while the power is OFF and the setting key is operated to the ON position. To do. That is, the power is turned on with both the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 and the mode setting lock unit 89 turned on. As a result, power is supplied to the gaming machine, and the gaming machine is activated to enter a “gaming mode change state” where the setting of the gaming mode can be changed to an arbitrary setting.

  When there is setting information in the setting storage unit 174 stored and held by the storage holding unit (second storage holding unit), the information display unit 88 displays a value indicating a game mode corresponding to the setting information. In the “game mode change state”, when changing the game mode displayed on the information display unit 88, that is, the currently set game mode, the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is pressed. For example, when the currently set game mode is the game mode 3, the information display unit 88 displays [--- 3]. If the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is pressed once in this state, the display mode of the information display unit 88 is changed to [--- 4]. After that, every time the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is pressed once, [--- 5] → [--- 1] → [--- 2] → [--- 3]... To do. Then, the game mode is determined and set by returning the setting key from the ON position to the OFF position in a state where the operator's arbitrary game mode (for example, game mode 4) is displayed on the information display unit 88. . As a result, the game mode 4 is set, and the pachinko gaming machine is in a state where the game (interrupt processing such as special symbol success / failure determination or the like) can be started. As described above, means for selecting a game mode using the RAM clear / mode setting switch is also referred to as “game mode selection means” or “determination probability selection means”. Further, means for determining and setting the selected game mode is also referred to as “game mode setting means” or “determination probability setting means”.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on for the first time (after manufacture), when the power is turned on for the first time after replacement of the main control board 80, or when the setting information in the setting storage unit 174 is abnormal, any setting information is stored. The value indicating the game mode is not displayed. In addition, the value [----] is displayed on the information display section 88, and the game mode is set unless one of the game modes is selected by pressing the RAM clear / mode setting switch at least once. Not.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the main control main process according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Differences from the main control main process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 12 will be mainly described, and description of common processes will be omitted. In the main control main process of the fifth embodiment, after the processes of S108 and S109, it is determined whether or not the storage information (base information) in the base storage unit 175 provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 is abnormal. The base storage unit determination process is performed (S111), and the process proceeds to S110. This base storage unit determination process (S111) is executed only once with the power-on after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter (after the game is started). Details of the base storage unit determination process will be described later.

[Mode setting processing]
Next, the mode setting process (S106) according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Differences from the mode setting process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 14 will be mainly described, and description of common processes will be omitted. In the mode setting process of the fifth embodiment, if it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is ON (YES in S3101) and it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting key is ON (YES in S3102), then The setting information stored in the setting storage unit (setting information stored in the storage holding means) is read, and if there is stored setting information, a value indicating the game mode corresponding to the setting information is displayed as an information display. To display. Here, although not shown in FIG. 61, when the setting information (normal setting information) is not stored in the setting storage unit, or when the stored setting information is abnormal, any setting information is stored. A value (symbol) indicating the state (no game mode is selected) is displayed as not stored ([----] described above).

  Next, following S3103 and S3104, it is determined whether there is an operation (input) of the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 (S3105). If it is determined in S3105 that there is an input from the RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 (YES in S3105), the setting information indicating the selected game mode is updated and stored (S3106), and the information display section is updated. The value indicating the game mode corresponding to the game mode is updated and displayed (S3107), and the process proceeds to S3108. Here, although not shown in FIG. 61, in a state where no setting information is stored (a state where [----] is displayed), the mode setting key is switched from ON to OFF, and the game mode is set. When the change state is ended, the pachinko gaming machine remains in the game disabled state and does not enter the game start state. That is, in order to change from a state in which no setting information is stored to a game start state (set any game mode), at least one RAM clear / mode setting switch 830 is set in the game mode change state. It is necessary to perform an operation (input).

  If it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3101), then a setting storage unit determination process described later is performed (S3132), and a game mode corresponding to the setting information in the setting storage unit is set. , The process proceeds to S3118. If it is determined in S3102 that the mode setting key is not ON (NO in S3102), then a setting storage unit determination process described later is performed (S3134), and the process proceeds to S3111.

[Setting storage section judgment processing]
Next, the setting storage unit determination process (S3132) according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The setting storage unit determination process (S3132) is a process executed in the mode setting process (S106) of the fifth embodiment, and is executed when it is determined in S3101 that the initialization flag is not ON (NO in S3101). The First, check data relating to setting information stored in the setting storage unit of the main control unit is calculated (S3301), and it is determined whether the check data is normal (S3302). That is, in S3302, it is determined whether or not the setting information in the setting storage unit stored and held by the storage holding means is normal. The means for determining whether or not the setting information stored in the setting storage unit (also referred to as “setting probability storage means”) when starting the power supply is normal is also referred to as “first abnormality determination means”. In addition, means for determining whether or not the game information stored in the first game information storage unit has an abnormality when power supply is started is also referred to as “second abnormality determination means”. The means for determining whether or not the game information stored in the second game information storage unit has an abnormality when starting the power supply is also referred to as “third abnormality determination means”. The means for determining whether or not the base information stored in the base storage unit has an abnormality when the power supply is started is also referred to as “fourth abnormality determination means”.

  In S3302, the check data is normal, that is, there is no abnormality in the setting information stored in the setting storage unit (setting information stored and held by the storage holding unit) (any normal setting information is stored). Is determined (YES in S3302), the process ends and the process proceeds to S3133 in the mode setting process (S106). On the other hand, there is an abnormality in the check data (including the case where any setting information is not stored), that is, information indicating a normal game mode (game modes 1 to 5) is not stored, or any setting information Is determined not to be stored (NO in S3302), then the storage area (setting information) of the setting storage unit is initialized (S3303), the game mode non-setting flag is turned ON (S3304), and the game mode setting instruction is issued. A notification command is transmitted (S3305), and an infinite loop is entered. By sending a game mode setting instruction command (such as a sub-control unit), a message such as “Please set the game mode” is displayed on a predetermined display unit (for example, the display screen 7a or the back side display unit of the game board). To do. Thereby, the game clerk operates the RAM clear / mode setting switch and recognizes that the game mode setting means needs to be set by the game mode setting means. Further, by making an infinite loop after S3305, the game cannot be started in a state where the game mode is not set (the game is disabled). Thereby, it is possible to surely prevent an unintended game mode from being set and a player or a game store from suffering an unexpected disadvantage. In the setting storage unit determination process in S3134, the same process as the setting storage unit determination process in S3132 is performed, and thus description and illustration are omitted.

  Next, the base storage unit determination process (S111) according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the base storage unit determination process (S111), first, check data relating to a base value stored in the base storage unit of the main control unit is calculated (S3401), and it is determined whether the check data is normal (S3402). That is, in S3402, it is determined whether there is any abnormality in the base information of the base storage unit stored and held by the storage holding means. In S3402, it is determined that the check data is normal, that is, the base information stored in the base storage unit (the base information stored and stored by the storage holding unit) is not abnormal (normal base information is stored). If this is the case (YES in S3402), base information stored in the base storage unit (base information stored and held by the storage holding means) that is the base value at the time of the previous power interruption is displayed on the information display unit (S3403), Finish the process. On the other hand, there is an abnormality in the check data (including the case where none of the base information is stored), that is, information indicating a normal base value is not stored, or no base value is stored If this is the case (NO in S3402), then the storage area (base information) of the base storage unit is initialized (S3403), a base storage unit abnormality notification command is transmitted (S3405), and the initial base value (specifically, “0”) ”) Is displayed (S3406), and the process ends.

  By sending a base storage unit abnormality notification command (such as a sub-control unit), a predetermined display unit (for example, the display screen 7a or the backside display unit of the game board) will display an error such as “There is an abnormality in the base value” Display a message. Thereby, the game shop clerk, etc., recognizes that the inspection related to the base display is necessary at the opportunity. Note that an abnormality related to the base display does not have a direct influence on the game, so that the game can be started. Instead of this, the game may be disabled, and the game may be disabled until the abnormality is resolved.

  Next, the power-off monitoring process (S209) according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Differences from the power-off monitoring process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 44 will be mainly described, and description of common processes will be omitted. In the power-off monitoring process (S209) of the fifth embodiment, if it is determined that a power-off signal has been input (YES in S2651), then the data (state, game) stored in the current first game information storage unit Information) is stored in the save area of the RAM of the main control unit (S2652), and then the data (state, game information) stored in the current second game information storage unit is saved in the RAM of the payout control unit (S2653), then the data (setting information) stored in the current setting storage unit is stored and held in the RAM save area of the main control unit (S2654), and then stored in the current base storage unit The stored data (base information) is stored and held in the save area of the RAM of the main control unit (S2655), the power flag is turned on (S2656), and the process is terminated. This makes it possible to reliably store and hold the backup target data stored in the backup area when a power interruption occurs.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, game information, setting information, and base information are stored in different storage areas, and an arbitrary initialization process using the RAM clear / mode setting switch is set as only game information. Yes. Even when the game information is initialized, if there is no abnormality in the stored and stored setting information, the game mode is set to a value based on the setting information, so that the setting operation of the game mode is performed again at the time of initialization. Eliminates the need for more efficient setting of gaming machines. The same applies when there is an abnormality in the stored game information. In addition, the setting information and the base information are excluded from any initialization processing using the RAM clear / mode setting switch, so that a fair gaming machine can be provided.

[Other aspects]
In the above-described embodiment, the mode setting switch 82 is constituted by a slide type dip switch. The mode setting switch is not limited to such a mode, and may be a rotary switch or a push-type or push-up type binary switch, for example. For example, when an arbitrary game mode is set, information (for example, [2]) indicating the currently selected game mode is displayed on the information display unit 88 every time the binary switch is operated. It is assumed that the game mode to be selected changes from [2] → [3] → [4] for each operation.

  In addition, in a gaming machine in which the game mode setting switch such as a binary switch or a rotary switch can be changed, the initial value of the game mode in the game mode change state when the RAM is cleared must be specified. You may make it set (setting) in game mode (For example, game mode 3 which is the middle value of five steps). The stored information indicating the game mode is erased by the RAM clear process. Then, in the game mode change state after the RAM is cleared, by operating the game mode change switch in one direction, this specific game mode (game mode 3) is changed in order to game mode 2 and game mode 1, and the desired mode is changed. The game mode shall be selected. Further, in the game mode change state after the RAM is cleared, by operating the game mode change switch in the other direction, the specific game mode (game mode 3) is changed in order to the game mode 4 and the game mode 5, and the desired mode is changed. The game mode shall be selected. Thereby, the operation mode of the setting change after the RAM is cleared is common to all the gaming machines (for example, when the setting is set to 1, any gaming machine is operated twice in one direction). This also makes it possible to reduce mistakes in setting changes when changing the game modes of a plurality of gaming machines. In addition, this specific game mode (initial game mode) may be a game mode in which the jackpot probability has an intermediate value among the game modes provided in the gaming machine (corresponding to the game mode 2 in this embodiment). Thereby, as long as the RAM is cleared and the setting change state is entered, it is possible to set the game mode in which the game store and the player are balanced. Further, when it is desired to set a plurality of gaming machines to such a balanced gaming mode, it is possible to set without operating the gaming mode change switch. This also makes it possible to reduce the number of operations (operation procedures) involved in changing the game mode setting as much as possible, and simplify the setting operation.

  In the above-described embodiment, the information display unit 88 is provided, and the game information to be displayed is changed depending on the period (period before entering the game-enabled state, period during which the game is enabled). Specifically, information specifying the game mode is displayed during the period before the game is enabled, and the base value is displayed during the game enabled period. In other words, the game mode display unit and the base value display unit are shared by one display unit. Instead of such a mode, a game mode display for displaying the game mode and a base display for displaying the base value may be provided separately. At this time, the information display unit of the first embodiment is used as a base display (also referred to as “game information display unit”), and one or more 7-segment displays are separately provided on the main control board. Is used as a game mode display (also referred to as “game information display section”). Even when they are provided separately, the period for displaying the information specifying the selected (setting) game mode on the game mode display is the game mode change state before the game start or the game mode confirmation state only. And The base display may be always displayed before the game is ready after the power is turned on, or may be always displayed after the game is ready. It is always displayed at least after the game is ready.

  In the embodiment described above, the RAM clear switch 83 is provided on the power supply board 109. However, instead of such a mode, the RAM clear switch may be provided on the main control board 80 (may be mounted). As a result, the members related to the change of the game mode (members for satisfying the specific condition) can be managed as much as possible on the main control board 80, and management can be facilitated and fraud prevention can be enhanced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, five types of game modes that can be set are provided, and the jackpot probability, the jackpot probability, and the winning probability of the jackpot type are varied depending on the game mode. Instead of such a mode, only the low probability jackpot probability may be varied depending on the game mode. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize how much profit can be obtained if the game mode is set, and the profit management of the gaming machine is facilitated.

  Further, in addition to the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine is provided with timer means (for example, a watch dog timer or a timer capable of measuring time after power-on) capable of measuring time (or measuring time). When the game mode setting is changed, the measurement value of the timer means (for example, clock information such as “9:30”) is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the stored measurement value is confirmed later. It may be possible. The measured value indicating the setting change time (time) stored in the storage area is a backup target. Further, since this information can be used for fraud prevention and fraud detection, it may be excluded from the object to be erased by RAM clear, like the base value. That is, even if the initialization is performed, the stored “measurement value indicating the setting change time (time)” is not deleted. The information on the measurement value may be output from a predetermined external terminal (external output terminal) to the outside of the gaming machine and managed by a hall computer or the like connected to the external terminal.

  In addition, in a game store, a video camera (including a shooting unit, a shooting data recording unit, etc.) that images the gaming machine, and a display unit (playback display unit) that displays (plays back) an image recorded by the video camera. A gaming machine monitoring system may be constructed. The video camera (surveillance camera) is arranged so that the entire gaming machine and the surrounding video can be recorded so that the changer is recorded when the game mode setting is changed. Then, if fraud is suspected regarding the setting of the game mode, or if a malfunction or error is suspected, the stored “measurement value indicating setting change time (time)” is read and a predetermined measurement value is selected. You may control so that the video camera image | video corresponding to the said time (time) may be reproduced | regenerated.

  As other modes of the above-described embodiment, the following modes can be given. In order to prevent the mode setting switch 82 from being freely operated, it is desirable to cover the mode setting switch 82 with a case with a key (clothing member) so that the mode setting switch 82 is locked. And only when it is necessary to change the game mode (setting change), the game mode can be changed by unlocking with the key and operating the mode setting switch 82 so as to satisfy the predetermined change condition. Good. Thereby, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the game mode is illegally changed. In addition, when the gaming machine (backup area) is initialized by operating the RAM clear switch 83, a sound of a predetermined volume (high volume) is output from the speaker, or instead of / addition thereof. By controlling the lighting of the panel lamp and the frame lamp, the fact that the initialization has been performed shall be notified conspicuously around. Thereby, it shall notify that there is a possibility that game mode was changed. In the first embodiment, the mode setting switch 82 is provided on the main control board 80 as shown in FIG. However, the installation location of the mode setting switch is not limited to such a mode. For example, the mode setting switch 82 may be provided on the payout control board 110. The mode setting switch 82 may be provided on a board that is separate from the main control board 80 and can communicate with the main control board 80 (selection information can be transmitted to the CPU of the main control unit).

  In the mode setting monitoring process (S210) of the first embodiment, during power supply (that is, during a game), the setting state of the mode setting switch is constantly monitored, and the game mode selected by the mode setting switch is: When a state different from the gaming mode set in the pachinko gaming machine is detected, the state is detected, and a predetermined display unit (display screen 7a or a display unit on the back side of the gaming machine), a speaker, or the outside of the gaming machine is detected. It was supposed to be notified by output. Although the game mode cannot be changed by operating the mode setting switch during a game, an unexpected game mode is set when the power is turned on again or the game mode is reset. There is a risk of unexpected situations. Therefore, even when a game is being played, if a mode setting switch is operated, an error notification is performed, so that such a situation can be prevented in advance.

  In another aspect, in addition to or instead of this, during the game, it is possible to detect whether the mode setting lock portion is in the ON position or the OFF position, and when the game becomes ready (game start) When the mode setting lock unit that was in the OFF position is operated to the ON position, this is notified on a predetermined display unit to prevent an unexpected situation. Specifically, when a game is started with the setting key inserted into the insertion part of the mode setting lock part (turned to the OFF position), the game store clerk or maintenance person touches the back side of the gaming machine for some reason. Sometimes, it accidentally (unintentionally) touches the setting key and turns to the ON position. Even in such a case, the game mode cannot be changed because the game is in progress, but a problem may occur when the power is turned on again.

  For example, the power is turned off while the setting key is operated during the game and the mode setting lock is in the ON position. When the game clerk next turns on the power, the mode setting lock portion is in the ON position, so that the gaming machine is in the gaming mode confirmation state and does not shift to the gaming start state. In such a state, it is possible to shift to the game start state by changing the mode setting lock to the OFF position. Also, the game mode setting is not changed, but to clear the RAM, when the RAM clear switch is pressed and the power is turned on, the mode setting lock part is unintentionally in the ON position, so the pachinko gaming machine The game mode change state is entered. In such a situation, the pachinko gaming machine cannot be smoothly shifted to a game-ready state, and the game store clerk or the like is bothered when the power is turned on. In addition, there is a possibility that the setting of the game mode is changed at an unintended timing by an unauthorized player, resulting in unexpected disadvantages.

  In order to prevent such a situation, the position (ON or OFF) of the mode setting lock is always monitored during the game, and when the mode setting lock is operated to the ON position during the game, a predetermined display is displayed. It is assumed that notification is given by an output to the outside (display screen 7a or display unit on the back side of the gaming machine), speaker, or gaming machine.

[Others]
Further, in the above-described configuration of the gaming machine, “a variable that can be changed into a start port where a game ball can enter and a first mode and a second mode in which a game ball can be entered is higher than the first mode. An identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information based on the game ball entering the start port or the variable start port may be provided. Further, “a variable entrance that can be changed between a state where a game ball can enter and a state where a game ball cannot enter, and a first entrance / exit determination based on the entrance to the start port. When the result of the first success / failure determination or the second success / failure determination is successful, the first success / failure determination means for executing the second success / failure determination based on the ball entering the variable start opening, Special game execution means capable of executing a special game that allows the variable entrance to enter the game. In addition, “the first gaming state where the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency and the second game state where the frequency of entering the game ball into the variable start port is higher than in the first game state. And a gaming state setting means for setting to the above. Here, “predetermined frequency” includes zero. In addition, “a starting point where a game ball can enter, a variable entrance state where a game ball can enter, a variable entrance where the game ball can not enter, Determination means for making a determination based on the entrance to the starting opening, and game control means for executing game control based on game information stored in the game information storage means when power supply is started from the power supply means And “” may be provided.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the number of times of opening the first grand prize port or the second grand prize port in one round is set to one. However, the number of times of opening the first grand prize port or the second grand prize port in one round is plural. It is also possible to have a round of different opening times. Further, in the first embodiment, the second special figure hold is a control process that digests the first special figure hold in preference to the so-called special figure 2 priority control process, but the first special figure hold is not limited thereto. A control process for digesting with priority over the second special figure hold, that is, a so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be used. In addition, the priority order is not set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are digested in order from the oldest stored one. Control processing, that is, control processing of so-called order of entering (memory order) digestion may be used.

  In the first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine having the specific area 39. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol determination result (without the specific area 39 in the big prize opening) ( It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine in which it is determined whether or not a high probability state is given after the big hit game is ended only by the type of the big hit symbol that is stopped and displayed. Needless to say, “This is based on the fact that the special symbol winning / decision determination results in a big hit (the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol)”. The pachinko gaming machine of Example 1 is also included in other types of gaming machines. Also, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and can enter a game ball that can enter and a game ball can enter There is a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and if the result of the determination of success or failure based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit, the large winning opening is made available for a predetermined time. This is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine in which a big hit game is executed when a game ball enters a big winning opening in a ball ready state and the game ball passes through a specific area, and a big hit game is executed. This pachinko gaming machine is called a so-called “1 type 2 type mixing machine”. When the result of the determination of success / failure based on the ball entering the start opening becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without passing through a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering game balls into the start opening. Further, it is possible to have a first base and a second start and to generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering the second start. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

(Reference invention 1)
Moreover, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; With
The determination probability setting means includes:
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability of the determination unit can be changed,
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery unit and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination unit may not be changed.

The gaming machine of reference invention 1-2 has a selection information determination process for determining selection information of the determination probability selection means when the power supply means starts to supply power in the gaming machine of reference invention 1-1. ,
The determination probability setting means includes:
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability corresponding to the selection information determined based on the selection information determination process is used as the determination probability of the determination unit. It may be set.

(Reference invention 2)
Further, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means based on establishment of a predetermined change condition;
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
Selection information monitoring means for monitoring selection information of the determination probability selection means in a period during which power is supplied by the power supply means,
Although the change condition is not satisfied, the selection information monitoring unit does not match the information indicating the determination probability stored in the gaming state information storage unit with the selection information of the determination probability selection unit. If it is determined that, predetermined error processing may be executed.

The gaming machine of reference invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 2-1,
When the error process is executed, the selection information monitoring means determines that the information indicating the determination probability stored in the gaming state information storage means matches the selection information of the determination probability selection means The error processing may be terminated based on the above.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or Reference Invention 2-2,
The change condition may be satisfied at least when the power supply unit starts power supply.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 to Reference Invention 2-3,
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; With
The change condition may be satisfied at least when the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit.

(Reference invention 3)
Further, in the configuration of the gaming machine described above, the gaming machine of the reference invention 3 is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected; With
A selection information determination process for determining selection information of the determination probability selection unit when the power supply unit starts power supply;
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, information indicating a determination probability specified based on the recovered game state information and selection information of the determination probability selection means are: If it is determined that they do not match, predetermined error processing may be executed.

  Thus, when the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means and the determination probability is to be changed, a predetermined error process is performed. This also makes it possible to notify or prevent the occurrence of an act of changing the determination probability while restoring the game state information.

In addition, the gaming machine of the reference invention 3-2 is based on the restored gaming state information in the gaming machine of the reference invention 3-1, when the gaming state information is restored by the gaming state information restoring means and the game is started. When it is determined that the information indicating the specified determination probability matches the selection information of the determination probability selecting means, the game may be executable without executing the error process.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the game state information is recovered and the game is started, the determination probability specified based on the recovered game state information and the determination probability corresponding to the selection information of the determination probability selecting means When it is determined that these match, it is possible to execute the game in a normal state without performing error processing. Thus, the game is started after confirming the selection information of the determination probability selection means at the start of the game. This also makes it possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 3-1 or reference invention 3-2.
The error process may include a game control stop process for stopping at least a part of the game control. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being executed while the determination probability corresponding to the selection information of the determination probability selection means and the determination probability specified based on the restored game state information do not match. .

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 to Reference Invention 3-3,
The error process includes a notification process for notifying that the information indicating the determination probability specified based on the restored gaming state information does not match the selection information of the determination probability selection means.

(Reference invention 4)
In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a probability setting function as described above, the game store expects a gaming machine with a high setting (a setting with a high probability of winning) in order to determine which setting to use. Select the machine. In addition, the game store side installs a lot of high-setting gaming machines that are likely to give a lot of profits to the players in order to call a lot of players, or gives a lot of profits to the players to get a lot of profits Many low-setting (low hit probability setting) gaming machines are installed, or an appropriate number of high-setting gaming machines are installed to balance them. Therefore, it is very important to set and manage the jackpot probability.

  On the other hand, there is a case where the setting of the gaming machine is confirmed when the profit amount attached to the player is far from the assumption. In addition, when the cause is that the setting of the gaming machine is not intended, the probability setting person on the amusement store side has set it erroneously (with a probability different from the schedule), or It is necessary to confirm whether the fraudster has set the probability illegally. However, since it is not known when the big hit probability setting has been changed, it takes a lot of labor to check the security camera or the like. In addition, when such an illegal act is performed, there is a risk that both the game store and the player are disadvantaged, the number of players decreases, and the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases.

  This reference invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and in gaming machines equipped with a determination probability setting function, it is possible to memorize the setting change time of the determination probability to prevent fraud, and to provide a fair gaming machine. It is to provide.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 invention is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
Timer means (counting means for timing) that counts at a fixed period;
Timer storage means for storing the count value of the timer means,
By performing a predetermined input operation with the start of power supply in the power supply means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed,
The timer storage unit stores a count value when the determination probability of the determination unit is changed.

  According to such a gaming machine, a determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability of the determination unit, and a determination probability selection unit that can select a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation And a determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. In addition, timer means (timer means) that counts at a constant period, and timer storage means that stores a predetermined count value of the timer means, the timer storage means is a timer means when the determination probability setting is changed It is assumed that the count value is stored. Thereby, when the setting of the determination probability is changed, the count value at that time can be stored, and the time when the setting of the determination probability is changed can be confirmed later. In addition, this makes it possible to confirm whether the change timing of the determination probability is appropriate, whether the changer is appropriate, and the like.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-1,
An external output terminal capable of outputting the count value stored in the timer storage means to the outside of the gaming machine is provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, the count value indicating the time when the determination probability stored in the timer storage means is changed can be output to the outside of the gaming machine. Thereby, it becomes possible to easily manage the setting change timing of the determination probability of each gaming machine using a hall computer connected to the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of reference invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 4-1 or reference invention 4-2.
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; With
The determination probability setting means includes:
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability of the determination unit can be changed,
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means is made unchangeable.

  According to such a gaming machine, the memory holding means capable of storing and holding gaming state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) even after the power supply is stopped. It is supposed to be prepared. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased and selected by the determination probability selection unit on the condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It was possible to change to the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, it is impossible to change the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection unit.

  Accordingly, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the determination probability setting is changed It becomes possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

The gaming machine monitoring system of Reference Invention 4-4 is
The gaming machine according to any one of Reference Invention 4-1 to Reference Invention 4-3;
A recording device having a photographing unit for photographing the gaming machine, and a storage unit for storing an image photographed by the photographing unit;
It is characterized by providing.

  According to such a gaming machine monitoring system, the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, a photographing unit that photographs the gaming machine, and a storage unit that stores an image photographed by the photographing unit. And a recording device. Thereby, it is possible to easily check the setting change timing or setting changer of the determination probability of the gaming machine by watching the video of the recording device at the time corresponding to the count value stored in the timer storage means. It becomes.

(Reference invention 5)
In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a probability setting function as described above, the game store expects a gaming machine with a high setting (a setting with a high probability of winning) in order to determine which setting to use. Select the machine. In addition, the game store side installs a lot of high-setting gaming machines that are likely to give a lot of profits to the players in order to call a lot of players, or gives a lot of profits to the players to get a lot of profits Many low-setting (low hit probability setting) gaming machines are installed, or an appropriate number of high-setting gaming machines are installed to balance them. Therefore, it is very important to set and manage the jackpot probability. Therefore, when setting the jackpot probability, in order to grasp which jackpot probability is set, it is preferable to provide a display unit for displaying information indicating the set jackpot probability for a predetermined period.

  In addition, since the game profit grant ratio based on the number of winning balls and out-balls is very important and useful game information for providing a fair gaming machine, a display unit for displaying information indicating the grant ratio is provided. It is preferable to provide it. However, in this way, providing a large number of display units such as a display unit that displays information indicating the probability of jackpot and a display unit that displays information indicating the grant rate of gaming profits is related to the space for installing gaming parts. It is difficult and the cost may be a problem.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair gaming machine by efficiently displaying a large number of game information by controlling the display time.

The gaming machine of reference invention 5-1 invention is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Game profit granting means for granting a predetermined amount of game profit based on the establishment of a specific condition;
A game information display unit capable of displaying predetermined game information;
With
The game information display unit displays information indicating a determination probability set by the determination probability setting means in a first period, and displays information indicating a game profit grant rate in a specific period in a second period. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, a determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability of the determination unit, and a determination probability selection unit that can select a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation And a determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. In addition, a game profit providing means for providing a game profit when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, entering a ball entrance or a specific symbol is stopped and displayed), and a game information display unit for displaying predetermined game information are provided. The game information display unit displays information indicating the set determination probability in the first period, and displays information indicating the game profit grant ratio in the specific period in the second period. Thereby, the game information (setting probability information or game profit granting ratio information) displayed on the game information display unit is made different depending on the time (first period or second period), and the display unit can be shared, It is possible to grasp game information appropriately.

The gaming machine of reference invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-1,
The first period is a period before the start of the game, and the second period is a period after the start of the game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the first period for displaying information indicating the set determination probability is set as the period before the game starts, and the second period for displaying information indicating the gaming profit grant ratio is set after the game starts. Period. That is, the determination probability set by a predetermined input operation before the start of the game is displayed before starting the game, and after starting the game by firing a game ball or the like, the determination probability is not set information. The percentage of game profits that accompanies the start of the game is displayed. Accordingly, it is possible to display appropriate information at an appropriate time, to enable the display unit to be shared, and to reliably grasp game information.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 5-2,
An entrance where game balls can enter,
First counting means capable of counting the number of game balls launched into the game area;
A second counting means capable of counting the number of game balls given by the gaming profit giving means,
The specific condition is established based on a game ball entering the entrance,
The information indicating the game profit grant ratio displayed on the game information display section after the game starts is information calculated based on the count values of the first counting means and the second counting means. To do.

  According to such a gaming machine, the entrance that establishes the specific condition, the first counting means that can count the number of balls to be launched into the game area, and the second counting means that can count the number of game balls given And comprising. The information indicating the game profit grant ratio is information calculated based on the count values of the first counting means and the second coefficient means. Thereby, the grant ratio of the game profit displayed in the second period after the game starts is calculated based on the number of shot balls and the number of game balls given. There is no (no change) game information. In addition, in the first period before the start of the game, even if the information indicating the game profit grant ratio is not displayed and the information indicating the determination probability is displayed, the game information is reliably grasped without causing any trouble. Making it possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-3,
The game information display unit displays information indicating the determination probability in the first period when the determination probability setting unit changes and sets the determination probability of the determination unit. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, when the determination probability of the determination means is changed and set, information indicating the determination probability is displayed in the first period. Accordingly, when a predetermined input operation is performed and the determination probability setting is changed, information indicating the determination probability is surely displayed in the first period, so that the game information can be grasped appropriately and reliably. It becomes possible. The game information display unit may not display information indicating the determination probability in the first period when the determination probability setting is not changed.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 to Reference Invention 5-4.
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; ,
With
The determination probability setting means includes:
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability of the determination unit can be changed,
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means is made unchangeable.

  According to such a gaming machine, the memory holding means capable of storing and holding gaming state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) even after the power supply is stopped. It is supposed to be prepared. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased and selected by the determination probability selection unit on the condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It was possible to change to the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, it is impossible to change the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection unit.

  Accordingly, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the determination probability setting is changed It becomes possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

(Reference invention 6)
In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a probability setting function as described above, the game store expects a gaming machine with a high setting (a setting with a high probability of winning) in order to determine which setting to use. Select the machine. In addition, the game store side installs a lot of high setting machines to attract many players, installs a lot of low setting machines to gain a lot of profits, and balance them Install an appropriate number of high-setting machines. However, since this is all determined by the game store side, none of the high-setting gaming machines are installed (all are set low), and there is a possibility that the player side will be significantly disadvantageous than the game store side. In addition, this may cause players to distrust the amusement store, resulting in a decrease in the number of players and a decrease in the operating rate of gaming machines.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and in a gaming machine equipped with a determination probability setting function, the determination probability setting mode is diversified by having a function of setting the determination probability at random. Therefore, it is intended to provide a gaming machine with high gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 6-1 is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Game state information storage means capable of storing game state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means,
A gaming machine in which the determination means makes a determination based on a determination probability stored in the gaming state information storage means,
The determination probability selection means includes random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities.

  According to such a gaming machine, a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability of the determination means, a storage probability storage means, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, A determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as a determination probability of the determination means; and gaming state information storage means capable of storing game state information including information indicating the set determination probability. Further, as the determination probability selection means, there is provided a random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. Thus, when the determination probability is selected (set) by the random selection means, the determination probability is randomly selected from a plurality of determination probabilities, and the determination probability is set. Also, this makes it impossible for the probability setter to intentionally set a specific determination probability, making it possible to set a balanced determination probability.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 6-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-1,
The determination probability selection means includes a specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities.

  According to such a gaming machine, as the determination probability selection means, in addition to the random selection means, the specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities is provided. Thereby, when selecting (setting) a determination probability by the specific probability setting means, a specific determination probability (for example, an intermediate determination probability among a plurality of determination probabilities) is selected from a plurality of determination probabilities, The determination probability is set. This also makes it possible to prevent a gaming machine having a setting value that is not intended by the probability setter from being set.

The gaming machine of reference invention 6-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-2.
According to the input operation mode of the determination probability selection means, it can be selected whether the determination probability is selected by the random selection means or the determination probability is selected by the specific probability selection means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the probability setter sets the determination probability at random according to the input operation mode (the first input operation mode, the second input operation mode, etc.) of the determination probability selection unit, or performs a specific determination. It is possible to select whether to set the probability. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of the determination probability at the game store.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 6-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-2 or reference invention 6-3.
An informing unit for informing which of the random selection means and the specific probability selection means has selected the determination probability is provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that a notification unit that notifies which of the random selection means and the specific probability selection means has determined the determination probability is provided. Thus, by confirming the notification mode of the notification unit, it is possible to confirm which determination probability selection means has selected (set) the determination probability.

The gaming machine of reference invention 6-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-4.
The notification unit notifies the player in a manner recognizable by the player.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. Accordingly, the player can recognize which determination probability selection means selects (sets) the determination probability selection (setting), and in which game machine to play a game or to select a gaming machine It can be used as a reference. This also makes it possible to prevent as much as possible from playing a game machine with an unintended setting.

The gaming machine of reference invention 6-6 is the gaming machine of reference invention 6-4 or reference invention 6-5.
The notifying unit notifies in a manner that a game clerk can recognize.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game store clerk (probability setting person) can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. Thereby, the game shop clerk (probability setting person) can recognize which determination probability selection means selects (sets) the selection (setting) of the determination probability. This also makes it possible to confirm whether or not the determination probability is selected (set) by the unintended determination probability selection means, and to select (set) the determination probability by the unintended determination probability selection means as much as possible. It becomes possible to prevent.

(Reference invention 7)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-1 invention is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; With
A gaming machine in which the determination means makes a determination based on a determination probability stored in the gaming state information storage means,
As the determination probability selection means, a random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities,
The determination probability setting means includes:
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability of the determination unit can be changed,
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means is made unchangeable.

  According to such a gaming machine, a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability of the determination means, a storage probability storage means, a determination probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, A determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as a determination probability of the determination means; and gaming state information storage means capable of storing game state information including information indicating the set determination probability. Further, as the determination probability selection means, there is provided a random selection means capable of randomly selecting a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities. Thus, when the determination probability is selected (set) by the random selection means, the determination probability is randomly selected from a plurality of determination probabilities, and the determination probability is set. Also, this makes it impossible for the probability setter to intentionally set a specific determination probability, making it possible to set a balanced determination probability.

  In addition, the game state information is provided with a memory holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information even after the power supply is stopped, and when the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased to obtain the game state information. It is possible to change to the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means (setting change by the determination probability setting means) on the condition that the game is started without restoring the game. That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, it is impossible to change the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection unit. Accordingly, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the determination probability setting is changed It becomes possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-1,
The determination probability selection means includes a specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities.

  According to such a gaming machine, as the determination probability selection means, in addition to the random selection means, the specific probability selection means capable of selecting a predetermined specific determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities is provided. Thereby, when selecting (setting) a determination probability by the specific probability setting means, a specific determination probability (for example, an intermediate determination probability among a plurality of determination probabilities) is selected from a plurality of determination probabilities, The determination probability is set. This also makes it possible to prevent a gaming machine having a setting value that is not intended by the probability setter from being set.

The gaming machine of reference invention 7-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-2.
According to the input operation mode of the determination probability selection means, it can be selected whether the determination probability is selected by the random selection means or the determination probability is selected by the specific probability selection means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the probability setter sets the determination probability at random according to the input operation mode (the first input operation mode, the second input operation mode, etc.) of the determination probability selection unit, or performs a specific determination. It is possible to select whether to set the probability. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of the determination probability at the game store.

In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 7-2 or Reference Invention 7-3,
An informing unit for informing which of the random selection means and the specific probability selection means has selected the determination probability is provided.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is assumed that a notification unit that notifies which of the random selection means and the specific probability selection means has determined the determination probability is provided. Thus, by confirming the notification mode of the notification unit, it is possible to confirm which determination probability selection means has selected (set) the determination probability.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 7-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-4.
The notification unit notifies the player in a manner recognizable by the player.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. Accordingly, the player can recognize which determination probability selection means selects (sets) the determination probability selection (setting), and in which game machine to play a game or to select a gaming machine It can be used as a reference. This also makes it possible to prevent as much as possible from playing a game machine with an unintended setting.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 7-6 is the gaming machine of reference invention 7-4 or reference invention 7-5.
The notifying unit notifies in a manner that a game clerk can recognize.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game store clerk (probability setting person) can recognize the notification mode of the notification unit. Thereby, the game shop clerk (probability setting person) can recognize which determination probability selection means selects (sets) the selection (setting) of the determination probability. This also makes it possible to confirm whether or not the determination probability is selected (set) by the unintended determination probability selection means, and to select (set) the determination probability by the unintended determination probability selection means as much as possible. It becomes possible to prevent.

(Reference Invention 8)
In addition, the conventional gaming machine has a function of holding the gaming state when the supplied power is cut off, and returning the gaming state based on the stored memory when power is supplied again, a so-called backup function. Some have When a probability setting function is installed in a gaming machine having a backup function as described above, it is possible to change the setting while maintaining the gaming state, and depending on how these functions are used, it is easy to generate a big hit. There is a risk that fraud will occur or a fair gaming machine cannot be provided.

  In addition, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a probability setting function, in order for the game store side to decide which setting to use, the player expects a gaming machine with a high setting (a setting with a high probability of jackpot) and selects a gaming machine. select. In addition, the game store side installs a lot of high setting machines to attract many players, installs a lot of low setting machines to gain a lot of profits, and balance them Install an appropriate number of high-setting machines. However, since this is all determined by the game store side, none of the high-setting gaming machines are installed (all are set low), and there is a possibility that the player side will be significantly disadvantageous than the game store side. In addition, this may cause the player to feel distrust to the amusement store, resulting in a decrease in the number of players and a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  This reference invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and in a gaming machine equipped with a determination probability setting function, a predetermined restriction is set on the setting condition of the determination probability setting function, and the determination probability When the setting is changed, a fair gaming machine is provided by having a function of notifying that fact.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 8-1 invention is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; With
The determination probability setting means includes:
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability of the determination unit can be changed,
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed,
In the case of starting the game without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means,
The notification mode of the predetermined notification unit (liquid crystal, back lamp) is different between when the determination probability of the determination unit is changed by performing a predetermined input operation and when the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed. It is characterized by this.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to select and set the determination probability of the determination means from a plurality of determination probabilities to a predetermined determination probability by performing a predetermined input operation. In addition, the memory holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) even after the power supply is stopped is provided. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased and selected by the determination probability selection unit on the condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It was possible to change to the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, it is impossible to change the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection unit. Further, even when the game state information stored and retained by the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the game state information, there are times when the determination probability is changed and when the determination probability is not changed, The notification mode of the notification unit is different between when the determination probability is changed and when the determination probability is not changed.

  Accordingly, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the determination probability setting is changed It becomes possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. Further, whether or not the determination probability has been changed can be confirmed by the notification mode of the notification unit. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 8-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 8-1,
The notification unit notifies whether the determination probability of the determination unit has been changed or whether the determination probability of the determination unit has not been changed in a notification mode that can be recognized by the player.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed according to the notification mode of the notification unit. Thereby, the player can recognize whether or not the selection (setting) of the determination probability has been changed, and can be used as a reference when selecting which gaming machine to play. This also makes it possible to prevent as much as possible from playing a game machine with an unintended setting.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 8-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 8-1 or reference invention 8-2.
The notification means notifies whether the determination probability of the determination means has been changed or whether the determination probability of the determination means has not been changed in a notification form that can be recognized by a game clerk.

  According to such a gaming machine, a game clerk (probability setting person) can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed according to the notification mode of the notification unit. Thereby, the game clerk (probability setting person) can recognize whether or not the determination probability has been changed with the initialization of the game state information. This also makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation that the determination probability is unintentionally changed or the determination probability is not changed unintentionally as much as possible.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 8-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 8-2 or reference invention 8-3.
The identification information is variably displayed based on the determination result of the determination means, and the identification information display means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the determination result is a specific result,
The notification unit is characterized in that the notification mode is continued at least from a predetermined time after the start of power supply by the power supply means until the variation display of the identification information is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is provided with identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information, and a notification mode capable of recognizing whether or not the determination probability by the notification unit has been changed is from a predetermined time after the start of power supply, It is assumed that the period until the variation display of the identification information is executed, that is, until the game is started after the gaming machine is turned on. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the determination probability setting has been changed before the game starts. In addition, this makes it possible to refer to which gaming machine is used to select a gaming machine.

(Reference invention 9)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 9-1 invention is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
When the result of the determination is a specific result, special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; With
The determination probability setting means includes:
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability of the determination unit can be changed,
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means cannot be changed,
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization means, and when the determination probability of the determination means is changed by performing a predetermined input operation;
When the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, and the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed,
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means to start the game,
In this case, the notification mode of the predetermined notification unit (liquid crystal, back lamp) is varied.

  According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to select and set the determination probability of the determination means from a plurality of determination probabilities to a predetermined determination probability by performing a predetermined input operation. In addition, the memory holding means capable of storing and holding the game state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) even after the power supply is stopped is provided. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased and selected by the determination probability selection unit on the condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It was possible to change to the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, it is impossible to change the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection unit.

  In addition, the notification mode of the notification unit is different between when the game state information is restored and the game is started and when the game is started without restoring the game state information. Furthermore, even when the game state information stored and held by the memory holding means is erased and the game is started without restoring the game state information, there are times when the determination probability is changed and when the determination probability is not changed, The notification mode of the notification unit is different between when the determination probability is changed and when the determination probability is not changed.

  Accordingly, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the determination probability setting is changed It becomes possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. Further, whether or not the determination probability is changed and whether or not the game state information is restored can be confirmed by the notification mode of the notification unit. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

In addition, the gaming machine of the reference invention 9-2 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 9-1.
The notification unit notifies whether the determination probability of the determination unit has been changed, whether the determination probability of the determination unit has not been changed, or whether the game state information has been restored in a notification mode that the player can recognize. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the player can recognize whether the determination probability has been changed according to the notification mode of the notification unit and whether the game state information has been restored. As a result, the player can recognize whether or not the selection (setting) of the determination probability has been changed and whether or not the game state information has been restored, and in which game machine to play a game or to select a game machine It can be used as a reference. This also makes it possible to prevent as much as possible from playing a game machine with an unintended setting.

The gaming machine of reference invention 9-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 9-1 or reference invention 9-2.
The notification means notifies the game store clerk of whether the determination probability of the determination means has been changed, whether the determination probability of the determination means has not been changed, or whether the gaming state information has been restored. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the game store clerk (probability setting person) can recognize whether or not the determination probability is changed according to the notification mode of the notification unit and whether or not the game state information is restored. As a result, the game clerk (probability setting person) can recognize whether or not the game state information has been restored and whether or not the determination probability has been changed along with the initialization of the game state information. This also makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation that the determination probability is unintentionally changed or the determination probability is not changed unintentionally as much as possible.

The gaming machine of reference invention 9-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 9-2 or reference invention 9-3.
The identification information is variably displayed based on the determination result of the determination means, and the identification information display means for stopping and displaying the identification information in a specific manner when the determination result is a specific result,
The notification unit is characterized in that the notification mode is continued at least from a predetermined time after the start of power supply by the power supply means until the variation display of the identification information is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, including the identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information, the notification mode capable of recognizing whether the determination probability by the notification unit has been changed and whether the gaming state information has been restored is: It is assumed that the period from the predetermined time after the start of power supply to the time when the identification information change display is executed, that is, from when the gaming machine is turned on until the game is started, is continued. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not the determination probability setting has been changed and whether or not the game state information has been restored before the game starts. In addition, this makes it possible to refer to which gaming machine is used to select a gaming machine.

(Reference Invention 10)
Further, when the amount of profit given to the player is far from the assumption, the setting of the gaming machine may be confirmed. In addition, when the cause is that the setting of the gaming machine is not intended, the probability setting person on the amusement store side has set it erroneously (with a probability different from the schedule), or It is necessary to confirm whether the fraudster has set the probability illegally. However, since it is not known when the big hit probability setting has been changed, it takes a lot of labor to check the security camera or the like. In addition, when such an illegal act is performed, there is a risk that both the game store and the player are disadvantaged, the number of players decreases, and the operating rate of the gaming machine decreases. Also, some of them have a movable object that operates to show the feasibility of a big hit game or that operates in accordance with the display of variation in symbols, and the movable object is reliably positioned at a specific position of the gaming machine. For this reason, there is one that causes an initial operation when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and in a gaming machine equipped with a determination probability setting function, the determination probability setting change is clarified and a fair gaming machine is provided.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 10-1 is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information;
When the determination result by the determination means is a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, and a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
A first movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
First movable control means for controlling the operation of the first movable part,
The first movable control unit is configured to initially operate the first movable unit as the power supply unit starts power supply.
When a predetermined determination probability is set by the determination probability setting means, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability is set is executed,
After the power supply means starts power supply, the setting notification is executed, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, a determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability of the determination unit, and a determination probability selection unit that can select a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation And a determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. A first moving part that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode with the start of power supply is provided, and when a predetermined determination probability is set, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability is set is executed Shall. And after electric power supply start, a setting alert | report is performed and the initial operation | movement of a 1st movable part is performed after that.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part executed in accordance with the start of power supply in the order of the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part. In addition, this prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed from being hindered by the initial operation of the first movable part, ensures the visibility of the setting notification, and has changed the setting. Can be reliably notified.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 10-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 10-1,
Along with the variation display of the identification information, an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect,
The setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit and executed.
The initial operation of the first movable unit is an operation mode of passing through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect is provided, the setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit, and the initial operation of the first movable unit has a position overlapping the front of the effect display unit. It is set as the operation | movement aspect to pass. This prevents the setting notification displayed on the effect display unit from being obstructed by the initial operation of the first movable unit, ensures the visibility of the setting notification, and reliably notifies that there has been a setting change. It becomes possible. The “initial operation of the first movable part” means that the first movable part has no operational defect (the movable part has no failure) or the first movable part is positioned at the initial position (origin position). This is an operation for moving to the initial position when it is in a place other than the initial position, and is an operation process executed when the power is turned on. This is also referred to as home return operation.

The gaming machine of reference invention 10-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 10-2.
A second movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
Second movable control means for controlling the operation of the second movable part,
The second movable control means is for initial operation of the second movable part as the power supply means starts power supply,
The initial operation of the second movable unit is an operation mode that does not pass the position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit,
After the power supply means starts supplying power, an initial operation of the second movable part is executed, and thereafter an initial operation of the first movable part is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the first movable part, the second movable part that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode with the start of power supply is provided, and the initial operation of the second movable part is the first Unlike 1 movable part, it is set as the operation | movement aspect which does not pass the position which overlaps with the front surface of an effect display part. Then, after the start of power supply, the initial operation of the second movable part is executed, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed. Thereby, the initial operation of the second movable unit that does not hinder the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification is preceded by the initial operation of the first movable unit that can impair the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification. It is possible to execute. This also makes it possible to quickly advance the initial operation of the movable part and quickly bring the gaming machine into a game-ready state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 10-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 10-3.
The setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part are executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part can be executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed. Thereby, the initial operation of the second movable part that does not hinder the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification is executed in parallel with the setting notification, and the setting notification is displayed after performing the setting notification for a predetermined period. It is possible to execute the initial operation of the first movable part that can hinder the visibility of the effect display part. As a result, the initial operation of the first movable part and the second movable part can be quickly terminated without impeding the visibility of the setting notification, and the gaming machine after power-on can be quickly brought into a game-ready state. Become.

  The setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part are started in parallel, and the initial operation of the second movable part is completed even after the setting notification for a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of the setting change). If not, the initial operation of the first movable part may be executed in parallel with the initial operation of the second movable part that is continued, or after the initial operation of the second movable part is completed. May be. In addition, when the setting notification is continued even after the elapse of a predetermined period (a period sufficient for the notification of the setting change), the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part are executed in parallel after the elapse of the predetermined period. May be. In other words, the period during which the initial operation of the first movable part is not performed may be set as a predetermined period (a period sufficient for reporting the setting change) as the setting notification execution period.

The gaming machine of reference invention 10-5 is the gaming machine of reference invention 10-1 to reference invention 10-4.
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; With
The determination probability setting means includes:
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability of the determination unit can be changed,
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means is made unchangeable.

  According to such a gaming machine, the memory holding means capable of storing and holding gaming state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) even after the power supply is stopped. It is supposed to be prepared. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased and selected by the determination probability selection unit on the condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It was possible to change to the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, it is impossible to change the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection unit.

  Accordingly, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the determination probability setting is changed It becomes possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

(Reference Invention 11)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information;
When the determination result by the determination means is a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, and a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
A first movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
First movable control means for controlling the operation of the first movable part,
The first movable control unit is configured to initially operate the first movable unit as the power supply unit starts power supply.
When a predetermined determination probability is set by the determination probability setting means, setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability is set is executed,
A setting notification confirmation unit for determining whether or not the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time;
The first movable control unit performs an initial operation of the first movable unit after it is determined that the setting notification checking unit has performed setting notification for a predetermined time after the power supply unit starts supplying power. It is characterized by.

  According to such a gaming machine, a determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability of the determination unit, and a determination probability selection unit that can select a predetermined determination probability from a plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation And a determination probability setting means capable of setting the selected determination probability as the determination probability of the determination means. A first moving part that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode with the start of power supply is provided, and when a predetermined determination probability is set, a setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability is set is executed Shall. In addition, a setting notification confirmation unit for confirming that the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined time is provided, and after the start of power supply, after determining that the setting notification has been executed for a predetermined time, the initial operation of the first movable unit is executed.

  In addition, a first signal transmission unit that transmits a first signal indicating that the setting notification has been executed after the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time is provided, and after the first signal is received after power supply starts, the first movable The initial operation of the unit may be executed.

  Thereby, it is possible to execute the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part executed in accordance with the start of power supply in the order of the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part. In addition, it is possible to execute the initial operation of the first movable part after securing the set notification time of the predetermined time. Also, this prevents the visibility of the setting notification indicating that there has been a setting change from being hindered by the initial operation of the first movable part, and ensures the visibility of the setting notification for a predetermined period of time, It is possible to reliably notify that the setting has been changed.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-1,
Along with the variation display of the identification information, an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect,
The setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit and executed.
The initial operation of the first movable unit is an operation mode of passing through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect is provided, the setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit, and the initial operation of the first movable unit has a position overlapping the front of the effect display unit. It is set as the operation | movement aspect to pass. This prevents the setting notification displayed on the effect display unit from being obstructed by the initial operation of the first movable unit, ensures the visibility of the setting notification, and reliably notifies that there has been a setting change. It becomes possible. The “initial operation of the first movable part” means that the first movable part has no operational defect (the movable part has no failure) or the first movable part is positioned at the initial position (origin position). This is an operation for moving to the initial position when it is in a place other than the initial position, and is an operation process executed when the power is turned on. This is also referred to as home return operation.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-2.
A second movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
Second movable control means for controlling the operation of the second movable part,
The second movable control means is for initial operation of the second movable part as the power supply means starts power supply,
The initial operation of the second movable unit is an operation mode that does not pass the position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit,
After the power supply means starts supplying power, an initial operation of the second movable part is executed, and thereafter an initial operation of the first movable part is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, in addition to the first movable part, the second movable part that initially operates in a predetermined operation mode with the start of power supply is provided, and the initial operation of the second movable part is the first Unlike 1 movable part, it is set as the operation | movement aspect which does not pass the position which overlaps with the front surface of an effect display part. Then, after the start of power supply, the initial operation of the second movable part is executed, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed. Thereby, the initial operation of the second movable unit that does not hinder the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification is preceded by the initial operation of the first movable unit that can impair the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification. It is possible to execute. This also makes it possible to quickly advance the initial operation of the movable part and quickly bring the gaming machine into a game-ready state.

The gaming machine of reference invention 11-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 11-3.
The setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part are executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part can be executed in parallel, and then the initial operation of the first movable part is executed. Thereby, the initial operation of the second movable part that does not hinder the visibility of the effect display unit that displays the setting notification is executed in parallel with the setting notification, and the setting notification is displayed after performing the setting notification for a predetermined period. It is possible to execute the initial operation of the first movable part that can hinder the visibility of the effect display part. As a result, the initial operation of the first movable part and the second movable part can be quickly terminated without impeding the visibility of the setting notification, and the gaming machine after power-on can be quickly brought into a game-ready state. Become.

  The setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part are started in parallel, and the initial operation of the second movable part is completed even after the setting notification for a predetermined period (a period sufficient for notification of the setting change). If not, the initial operation of the first movable part may be executed in parallel with the initial operation of the second movable part that is continued, or after the initial operation of the second movable part is completed. May be. In addition, when the setting notification is continued even after the elapse of a predetermined period (a period sufficient for the notification of the setting change), the setting notification and the initial operation of the first movable part are executed in parallel after the elapse of the predetermined period. May be. In other words, the period during which the initial operation of the first movable part is not performed may be set as a predetermined period (a period sufficient for reporting the setting change) as the setting notification execution period.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-3 or Reference Invention 11-4.
Comprising an initial operation confirmation means for determining whether or not the initial operation of the second movable part is completed;
The first movable control unit is configured to determine that the setting notification confirmation unit has executed the setting notification for a predetermined time, and after determining that the initial operation confirmation unit has finished the initial operation, the first movable unit The initial operation is executed.

  According to such a gaming machine, the initial operation confirmation means for determining whether or not the initial operation of the second movable part has been completed is provided. Then, after the setting notification is executed for a predetermined time and after the initial operation is completed, the initial operation of the first movable unit is executed. Thereby, it is possible to execute the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part, which are performed with the start of power supply, before the initial operation of the first movable part. In addition, since the setting notification time for a predetermined time is ensured and the initial operation of the first movable part is started after the operation of the second movable part is completed, the visibility of the setting notification indicating that the setting has been changed is provided. It is possible to prevent the first moving part from being obstructed by the initial operation and reliably notify that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, after completing the initial operation of the second movable part, there is provided second signal transmission means for transmitting a second signal indicating that the initial operation is completed. Then, after receiving both the first signal transmitted after executing the setting notification for a predetermined time and the second signal transmitted after completing the initial operation of the second movable part, the initial operation of the first movable part It is good also as what performs.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 11-1 to Reference Invention 11-5,
Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; With
The determination probability setting means includes:
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability of the determination unit can be changed,
When the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery means and the game is started, the determination probability of the determination means is made unchangeable.

  According to such a gaming machine, the memory holding means capable of storing and holding gaming state information including information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means (also referred to as “setting information”) even after the power supply is stopped. It is supposed to be prepared. When the power supply is started, the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit is erased and selected by the determination probability selection unit on the condition that the game is started without restoring the game state information. It was possible to change to the determination probability (setting change by the determination probability setting means). That is, when the game state information is restored and the game is started based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding unit, it is impossible to change the determination probability selected by the determination probability selection unit.

  Accordingly, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means, it is necessary to initialize the gaming state, and the game starts when the determination probability setting is changed It becomes possible to set the game state at the time to the initial state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game.

(Reference Invention 12)
The gaming machine of Reference Invention 12-1 is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information;
When the determination result by the determination means is a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, and a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
Game information storage means for storing game information including a determination result by the determination means;
Setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
First memory holding means capable of storing game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period after power supply is stopped based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage;
A second storage holding unit capable of storing the setting information stored in the setting probability storage unit for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage;
Game information recovery means capable of recovering game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply;
When the power supply means starts power supply by a predetermined input operation, the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased, and the game information when the power supply voltage drop is detected is not restored. Information initialization means, and
When the game information initialization means erases the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed by the determination probability setting means,
When the game information restored by the game information restoration means restores the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, the determination probability setting means cannot change the determination probability of the determination means;
When the game information stored and held by the first storage holding unit is erased and the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding unit is predetermined normal information. When there is
The game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased, and the game is started with the determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means. is there.

  According to such a gaming machine, the determination means has a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities, selects a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, and determines the selected determination probability. It can be set as the determination probability. Also, setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the selected (set) determination probability, game information storage means for storing game information including a determination result by the determination means, and game information is stored even after power supply is stopped. First memory holding means for holding, second memory holding means for storing and holding the setting information even after the power supply is stopped, game information restoring means for restoring the stored game information, and stored and held by a predetermined input operation Game information initialization means for erasing the game information.

  Then, deleting the game information stored and held by the game information initialization means is a condition for changing the setting of the determination probability, and if the stored game information is not deleted, the setting of the determination probability is disabled. Yes. Further, when the stored game information is deleted and the determination probability setting is not changed, if the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means is normal (that is, if there is no abnormality), the game information is displayed. The game is started by setting the determination probability based on the setting information stored and stored.

  Thus, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability, it is necessary to initialize the game information, and the game state at the start of the game when the determination probability setting is changed is initialized to It becomes possible to set the state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game. Also, when the game information is initialized and the determination probability setting is not changed, if the stored setting information is normal, the determination probability is set based on the stored setting information. Thus, the game can be started. This eliminates the need for setting the determination probability again when initializing the game information, and enables efficient setting of the gaming machine.

  The normal information is information indicating a plurality of determination probabilities stored by the determination probability storage means, and is information indicating determination probabilities that can be set by the determination probability setting means. For example, when any one of the three types (plurality) of determination probabilities can be set, the three types of settings are set as setting 1, setting 2, and setting 3, respectively, and these setting 1, setting 2, or setting 3 This information is called normal information. Information that does not indicate setting 1, setting 2, or setting 3 is referred to as abnormal information (non-normal information). In addition, the first abnormality determining means for determining whether or not the information stored in the set probability storage means at the time of starting the power supply is abnormal, and the game information stored in the game information storage means at the time of starting the power supply Second abnormality determining means for determining whether or not there is an abnormality. Also provided with setting information recovery means for recovering setting information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means when the power supply means starts to supply power And

In addition, the gaming machine of the reference invention 12-2 is the gaming machine of the reference invention 12-1,
When the game information stored and held by the first storage holding unit is erased and the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding unit is not predetermined normal information. When the game is started, it is impossible to start the game.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is erased, but when the determination probability setting is not changed (setting operation), there is no abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means. As a condition, a determination probability is set based on the setting information and the game is started. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means, it is impossible to start the game in a state where there is an abnormality. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the setting information, without setting any judgment probability, it is sure to be in a non-gamable state before the game starts, and an unexpected disadvantage will occur in the game store or player It becomes possible to prevent.

The gaming machine of reference invention 12-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 12-1 or reference invention 12-2.
When the game information stored and held by the first storage holding unit is erased and the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding unit is not predetermined normal information. When the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased, the determination probability of the determination means is set by the determination probability setting means, and the game can be started. It is.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is erased, but when the determination probability setting is not changed (setting operation), there is no abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means. As a condition, a determination probability is set based on the setting information and the game is started. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means, it is impossible to start the game in the state where there is an abnormality, and the game information is erased and further determined with a predetermined input operation. The game can be started by setting the determination probability by the probability setting means. That is, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means, the game can be started by deleting the game information and resetting the determination probability. Thereby, when there is an abnormality in the setting information, it is necessary to set an arbitrary determination probability with a predetermined input operation before the game starts. This also prevents unexpected decision probabilities or abnormal decision probabilities from being set, and prevents unforeseen disadvantages from occurring in game stores and players. Become.

The gaming machine of reference invention 12-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 12-2 or reference invention 12-3.
When the game information stored and held by the first storage holding unit is erased and the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding unit is not predetermined normal information. when,
A notification indicating that it is necessary to set the determination probability of the determination unit by the determination probability setting unit is performed on a predetermined display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is erased, but the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is abnormal when the determination probability setting is not changed (setting operation). Performs a notification indicating that it is necessary to perform a predetermined input operation and to set a predetermined determination probability by the determination probability setting means on a predetermined display unit. As a result, even when the setting information is abnormal and the game becomes impossible (game does not start), the means for canceling the game impossible state (for making the game possible state) is easily and clearly grasped. It becomes possible.

  According to the gaming machine of this reference invention, it is possible to provide a fair and efficient gaming machine by providing a predetermined restriction on the setting condition of the determination probability setting function.

(Reference Invention 13)
In addition, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 13-1 is
Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information;
When the determination result by the determination means is a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, and a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
Game information storage means for storing game information including a determination result by the determination means;
Setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
First memory holding means capable of storing game information stored in the game information storage means for a predetermined period after power supply is stopped based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage;
A second storage holding unit capable of storing the setting information stored in the setting probability storage unit for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage;
Game information recovery means capable of recovering game information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means when the power supply means starts power supply;
When the power supply means starts power supply by a predetermined input operation, the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased, and the game information when the power supply voltage drop is detected is not restored. Information initialization means, and
When the game information initialization means erases the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means, the determination probability of the determination means can be changed by the determination probability setting means,
When the game information restored by the game information restoration means restores the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means, the determination probability setting means cannot change the determination probability of the determination means;
When the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means is erased and the determination probability of the determination means is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means is predetermined normal information. When there is, the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is erased, and the game is started with the determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means.
If the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is predetermined normal information, the first memory holding The game information stored and held by the means is erased, and the game can be started with the determination probability of the determination means based on the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the determination means has a plurality of determination probabilities as the determination probabilities, selects a predetermined determination probability from the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation, and determines the selected determination probability. It can be set as the determination probability. Also, setting probability storage means for storing setting information indicating the selected (set) determination probability, game information storage means for storing game information including a determination result by the determination means, and game information is stored even after power supply is stopped. First memory holding means for holding, second memory holding means for storing and holding the setting information even after the power supply is stopped, game information restoring means for restoring the stored game information, and stored and held by a predetermined input operation Game information initialization means for erasing the game information.

  Then, deleting the game information stored and held by the game information initialization means is a condition for changing the setting of the determination probability, and if the stored game information is not deleted, the setting of the determination probability is disabled. Yes. Further, when the stored game information is deleted and the determination probability setting is not changed, if the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means is normal (that is, if there is no abnormality), the game information is displayed. The game is started by setting the determination probability based on the setting information stored and stored. Even if the game information stored and held by the game information initialization means is not erased, if there is an abnormality in the stored and held game information and the stored and held setting information is normal information, the game information is similarly stored. The game is started by setting a determination probability based on the setting information that is initialized and stored.

  Thus, in order to change the current determination probability setting to another determination probability, it is necessary to initialize the game information, and the game state at the start of the game when the determination probability setting is changed is initialized to It becomes possible to set the state. This makes it possible to provide a fair game. Also, when the game information is initialized and the determination probability setting is not changed, if the stored setting information is normal, the determination probability is set based on the stored setting information. Thus, the game can be started. This also initializes the game information even if the game information initialization means does not delete the game information when there is an abnormality in the stored game information due to the occurrence of some abnormality. Furthermore, if the setting information at this time is normal information, the game can be started without changing the setting of the determination probability. This also eliminates the need for setting the determination probability again when the game information is initialized, and enables efficient setting of the gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine of reference invention 13-2 is the gaming machine of reference invention 13-1,
If the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means is not the normal information, the game cannot be started. It is a feature.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is erased, but when the determination probability setting is not changed (setting operation), there is no abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means. As a condition, a determination probability is set based on the setting information and the game is started. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means and there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means, the start of the game in the state where there is an abnormality It is impossible. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the setting information, without setting any judgment probability, it is sure to be in a non-gamable state before the game starts, and an unexpected disadvantage will occur in the game store or player It becomes possible to prevent.

The gaming machine of reference invention 13-3 is the gaming machine of reference invention 13-1 or reference invention 13-2.
If the game information stored and held by the first memory holding means is abnormal and the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is not the normal information, the first memory holding means stores and holds the information. The game information can be erased and the game can be started after the determination probability of the determination means is set by the determination probability setting means.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is erased, but when the determination probability setting is not changed (setting operation), there is no abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means. As a condition, a determination probability is set based on the setting information and the game is started. On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the game information stored and held by the first storage holding means and there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means, the start of the game in the state where there is an abnormality The game can be started by disabling the game information and setting the determination probability by the determination probability setting means together with a predetermined input operation. That is, when there is an abnormality in the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding means, the game can be started by deleting the game information and resetting the determination probability. Thereby, when there is an abnormality in the setting information, it is necessary to set an arbitrary determination probability with a predetermined input operation before the game starts. This also prevents unexpected decision probabilities or abnormal decision probabilities from being set, and prevents unforeseen disadvantages from occurring in game stores and players. Become.

The gaming machine of reference invention 13-4 is the gaming machine of reference invention 13-2 or reference invention 13-3.
When the game information stored and held by the first storage holding unit is erased and the determination probability of the determination unit is not changed, the setting information stored and held by the second storage holding unit is not predetermined normal information. when,
A notification indicating that it is necessary to set the determination probability of the determination unit by the determination probability setting unit is performed on a predetermined display unit.

  According to such a gaming machine, the stored game information is erased, but the setting information stored and held by the second memory holding means is abnormal when the determination probability setting is not changed (setting operation). Performs a notification indicating that it is necessary to perform a predetermined input operation and to set a predetermined determination probability by the determination probability setting means on a predetermined display unit. As a result, even when the setting information is abnormal and the game becomes impossible (game does not start), the means for canceling the game impossible state (for making the game possible state) is easily and clearly grasped. It becomes possible.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine, 7b Production design display area (production design display part), 8 production design, 20 1st start opening, 21 2nd start opening, 30 1st big prize opening, 35 2nd big prize opening, 39 specific area 41a First special symbol display (first special symbol display unit), 41b Second special symbol display (second special symbol display unit), 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board (sub control) Part), 100 image control board (image control part), 103a first effect hold indicator, 103b second effect hold indicator.

Claims (6)

Determination means for performing determination based on establishment of a predetermined condition;
Identification information display means for variably displaying the identification information;
When the determination result by the determination means is a specific result, the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, and a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to the player;
A determination probability storage unit that stores a plurality of determination probabilities as a determination probability that the determination unit determines as a specific result;
A determination probability selecting means capable of selecting a predetermined determination probability among the plurality of determination probabilities by a predetermined input operation;
A determination probability setting means capable of setting a predetermined determination probability selected by the determination probability selection means as a determination probability of the determination means;
Power supply means for supplying power;
A first movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
First movable control means for controlling the operation of the first movable part,
The first movable control unit is configured to initially operate the first movable unit as the power supply unit starts power supply.
When a predetermined determination probability is set by the determination probability setting means, setting notification indicating that the predetermined determination probability is set is executed,
A setting notification confirmation unit for determining whether or not the setting notification has been performed for a predetermined time;
The first movable control unit performs an initial operation of the first movable unit after it is determined that the setting notification checking unit has performed setting notification for a predetermined time after the power supply unit starts supplying power. A gaming machine characterized by Along with the variation display of the identification information, an effect display unit capable of displaying a predetermined game effect,
The setting notification is displayed on the effect display unit and executed.
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein an initial operation of the first movable unit is an operation mode of passing through a position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit. A second movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode;
Second movable control means for controlling the operation of the second movable part,
The second movable control means is for initial operation of the second movable part as the power supply means starts power supply,
The initial operation of the second movable unit is an operation mode that does not pass the position overlapping the front surface of the effect display unit,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein after the power supply means starts supplying power, an initial operation of the second movable portion is executed, and thereafter an initial operation of the first movable portion is executed.   The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the setting notification and the initial operation of the second movable part are executed in parallel, and thereafter the initial operation of the first movable part is executed. Comprising an initial operation confirmation means for determining whether or not the initial operation of the second movable part is completed;
The first movable control unit is configured to determine that the setting notification confirmation unit has executed the setting notification for a predetermined time, and after determining that the initial operation confirmation unit has finished the initial operation, the first movable unit The game machine according to claim 3 or 4, wherein the initial operation is executed. Gaming state information storage means capable of storing gaming state information, including at least information indicating the determination probability set by the determination probability setting means;
Based on detecting a decrease in power supply voltage, the memory holding means capable of storing the game state information stored in the gaming state information storage means for a predetermined period after the power supply is stopped,
When the power supply means starts power supply, based on the game state information stored and held by the storage holding means, game state information recovery means for recovering the game state information when a drop in power supply voltage is detected;
A game state information initialization unit that erases the game state information stored and held by the memory holding unit when the power supply unit starts to supply power, and does not restore the game state information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected; With
The determination probability setting means includes:
In the case where the game is started without restoring the game state information by the game state information initialization unit, the determination probability of the determination unit can be changed,
6. The determination probability of the determination unit is not changeable when the game state information is recovered by the game state information recovery unit and the game is started. 6. The gaming machine described in 1.

Images